1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual...

317
1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 3 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 47 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 103 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 153 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 167 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 191 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 259 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 267 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information ..................................................................................................................... 293 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 307 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 313 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump. Owner's Identification Form

Transcript of 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual...

Page 1: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents

Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................3Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 47Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 103How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 153What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 167The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 191The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 259Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 267This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 293ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 307A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 313How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information SummaryA summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Owner's Identification Form

Page 2: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Owner's Identification

This Owner's Manual should be considereda permanent part of the car, and shouldremain with the car when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in affect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwith out incurring any obligation whatsoever.

OWNER

ADDRESSSTREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE /POSTAL CODE

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESSSTREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

OWNER'S SIGNATURE

DEALER'S SIGNATURE

Main Menu

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 3: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Introduction

Congratulations ! Your selection of a 1998 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner's manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Hondadealer's staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique toyour Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded by

symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

NOTICEa

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 4: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

Safety Labels — on the vehicle.Safety Messages — preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.These signal words mean:

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don't followinstructions.

Safety Headings — such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

Safety Section — such as Driver and Passenger Safety.Instructions — how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information — please read itcarefully.

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 5: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your vehicle.

Important Safety Precautions .......... 4Your Vehicle's Safety Features........ 5

Seat Belts........................................ 6

Airbags............................................ 7Seats & Seat-Backs........................ 8Head Restraints............................. 8Door Locks..................................... 8Pre-Drive Safety Checklist........... 9

Protecting Adults............................. 101. Close and Lock the Doors...... 102. Adjust the Front Seats............ 103. Adjust the Seat-Backs............. 114. Adjust the Head Restraints.... 125. Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts...................................... 126. Adjust the Steering Wheel..... 147. Maintain a Proper Sitting

Position................................. 14Advice for Pregnant Women...... 15Additional Safety Precautions.... 16

Protecting Children......................... 17All Children Must Be

Restrained................................ 17Children Should Sit in the Back

Seat........................................... 18The Passenger's Airbag Poses

Serious Risks to Children....... 18If You Must Drive with Several

Children.................................... 19

If a Child Requires CloseAttention................................... 20

Additional Safety Precautions.... 20General Guidelines for Using

Child Seats.............................. 21Protecting Infants........................ 25Protecting Small Children.......... 29Protecting Larger Children........ 32Using Child Seats with

Tethers...................................... 35Additional Information About Your

Seat Belts.................................. 38Seat Belt System Components... 38Lap/Shoulder Belt....................... 38Seat Belt Maintenance................ 39

Additional Information About YourSRS........................................... 40

SRS Components......................... 40How Your Airbags Work............ 40How Your SRS Indicator Light

Works...................................... 42SRS Service................................... 42Additional Safety Precautions.... 43

Carbon Monoxide Hazard.............. 44Safety Labels.................................... 45

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 6: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Important Safety Precautions

You'll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.Following are a fewrecommendations we consider mostimportant.

Always Wear Your Seat BeltA seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in asevere frontal collision. So even withairbags, make sure you and yourpassengers always wear your seatbelts, and wear them properly. (Seepage 12.)

Restrain All ChildrenChildren are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage 17.)

Be Aware of Airbag HazardsWhile airbags save lives, they cancause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page 5.)

Don't Drink and DriveAlcohol and driving don't mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions.Reaction time gets worse with everyadditional drink. So don't drink anddrive, and don't let your friends drinkand drive, either.

Control Your SpeedExcessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths, Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeConditionHaving a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page 196.)

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 7: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats & Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Airbags(8) Door Locks

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; and a collapsible steeringcolumn.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can't take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand always wear your seat beltsproperly. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 8: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Seat BeltsFor your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your vehicle isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Why Wear Seat BeltsSeat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle's built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including side andrear impacts and rollovers. (Yourairbags can only be helpful insevere frontal collisions.)

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the car andagainst other occupants.

Keep you from being thrownoutside of the car.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

What you should do: Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 9: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Airbags

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontalairbags to help protect the driver anda front seat passenger.

This system also includesan indicator light on the

instrument panel to alert you to apossible problem with the system.

Following are the most importantthings you need to know about yourairbags.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.They supplement seat belts byproviding extra protection for theheads and chests of front seatoccupants.

Airbags offer no protection in sideimpacts, rear impacts, rollovers,or minor or moderate collisions.Airbags are designed to deployonly during a severe frontalcollision (such as a 25 mph [40km/h] crash into a parked car ofsimilar size and weight).

Airbags can pose serious hazards.To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags save lives,they can cause serious injuries toadults and larger children who arenot wearing seat belts, are notwearing them properly, are sittingtoo close to the airbag, or are notsitting in a good position. Infantsand small children are at an evengreater risk of injury or death.

What you should do: Always wearyour seat belt properly and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

Driver and Passenger Safety

S R S

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 10: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Seats & Seat-BacksYour vehicle seats are designed tokeep you in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the seats' energyabsorbing materials.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases your risk of being injuredby striking the inside of the vehicleor being injured by an inflatingairbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far makesyour seat belt less effective andincreases your chance of slidingunder the seat belt and beingseriously injured in a crash.

What you should do: Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever thevehicle is moving.

Head RestraintsHead restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Door LocksKeeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle during a crash. It alsohelps prevent occupants fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out, and outsiders fromunexpectedly opening your doors.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 11: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Pre-Drive Safety ChecklistTo make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your vehicle's safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page12).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page 17).

Front seat occupants are sitting asfar back as possible from thesteering wheel and dashboard(see page 10).

Seat-backs are upright (see page11).

Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page 12).

All doors are closed and locked(see page 10).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page 163).

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 12: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Adults

IntroductionThe following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page 32 forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

1. Close and Lock the DoorsAfter everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Your vehicle has a door monitor lighton the instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance of a passenger, especiallya child, opening a door while thevehicle is moving and accidentallyfalling out. It also reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page 70 for how to lock thedoors.

2.Adjust the Front Seats

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or being struckby an inflating airbag during a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 13: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Adults

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel while stillmaintaining full control of the car.Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves their seat as far tothe rear as possible.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concernedabout sitting too close, werecommend that you investigate

whether some type of adaptiveequipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it forward and back to makesure the seat is locked in position.

See page 82 for how to adjust thefront seats.

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver's seat-back to a

comfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the airbaginflates.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,as far from the dashboard aspossible. If the passenger sits tooclose to the dashboard, they couldbe injured if the airbag inflates.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Sitting too close to an airbagcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from theairbags as possible.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 14: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Adults

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against an occupant's chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt and beingseriously injured in a crash. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page 82 for how to adjust seat-backs.

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant's head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect you from whiplashand other crash injuries.

See page 86 for how to adjust thehead restraints.

5.Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 15: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Adults

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. This

spreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.An improperly positioned seat beltcan cause severe neck injuries if thebelt is positioned too high, or seriouschest or internal injuries if the belt ispositioned too low.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back. This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 16: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Adults

If a Seat Belt Doesn't Work ProperlyIf your seat belt does not seem towork as it should, it may not protectyou in a crash. Anyone using aninoperative seat belt can be seriouslyinjured or killed. No one should sit ina seat with an inoperative seat belt.Have your Honda dealer check thebelt as soon as possible.

See page 38 for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

6.Adjust the Steering Wheel

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour face decreases the protectivecapability of the driver's airbag.

See page 63 for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

7.Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, with their bodies wellback in their seats and both feet onthe floor, until the car is parked andthe engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward, or puts oneor both feet up, their chance ofinjury during a crash is greatlyincreased.

In addition, if an occupant is out ofposition in the front seat, they can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the vehicle,or by being struck by an inflatingairbag.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 17: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Adults

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your vehicle'sairbags and other safety features,you must sit properly and wear yourseat belt properly.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a car.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Pregnant women should also sit asfar back as possible from thesteering wheel or dashboard. Thiswill reduce the risk of injuries toboth the mother and her unbornchild that can be caused by a crashor an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it's okay for you todrive.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 18: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Adults

Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts. Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort, or repositionthe shoulder part of a seat belt,can severely compromise theprotective capability of seat beltsand increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and an airbag.Carrying hard or sharp objects onyour lap, or driving with a pipe orother sharp object in your mouth,can result in injuries if yourairbags inflate.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.If your hands or arms are close tothe SRS covers in the center of thesteering wheel and on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe airbags inflate.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 19: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults do not know how to properlyprotect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your vehicle, besure to read this section.

All Children Must Be RestrainedEach year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. (See page21.)

Larger children should always berestrained with a seat belt. (See page32.)

Driver and Passenger Safety

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.Larger children should beproperly restrained with a seatbelt.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 20: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

Children Should Sit in the BackSeatAccording to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration recommends that allchildren ages 12 and under ride inthe back seat, properly restrained.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating airbag when they ride in theback.

The Passenger's Airbag PosesSerious Risks to ChildrenAirbags have been designed to helpprotect adults in a severe frontalcollision. To do this, the passenger'sairbag is quite large, and it inflateswith tremendous speed.

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's airbag. If theairbag inflates, it can hit the back ofthe child seat with enough force tokill or very seriously injure an infant.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's airbag can behazardous. If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child's head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to kill or veryseriously injure a small child.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passengerairbag. Whenever possible, largerchildren should sit in the back seat,properly restrained by a seat belt.(See page 32 for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 21: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

U.S. ModelsTo remind you of the passengerairbag hazards, and that childrenmust be properly restrained in theback seat, your vehicle has warninglabels on the dashboard and on thedriver's and front passenger's visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildrenYour vehicle has three seatingpositions in the back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your vehicle:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page 32).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page 10).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page 14).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page12).

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 22: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

If a Child Requires CloseAttentionMany parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes them to hazards from theairbag, and paying close attention toa child distracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, creatingserious safety risks.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Additional Safety PrecautionsUse childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors. Using this feature willprevent children from opening thedoors and accidentally falling out(see page 76).

Use the main power windowswitch to prevent children fromopening the rear windows. Usingthis feature will prevent childrenfrom playing with the windows,which could expose them tohazards or distract the driver (seepage 91).

Do not leave children alone in yourvehicle. Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and can be very hazardous.For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 23: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

General Guidelines for UsingChild SeatsThe following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

Selecting a Child SeatTo provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

1. The child seat should meet safetystandards. The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. Look for themanufacturer's statement ofcompliance on the box and seat.

2. The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants: Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlyrear-facing seats provide the supportan infant needs to protect their head,neck, and back. See page 25 foradditional information on protectinginfants.

Small Children: A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page 29 foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 24: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

3. The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour vehicle.

Whenever possible, we recommendthat parents test a child seat in thespecific vehicle seating position (orpositions) where they intend to usethe seat before making a purchase. Ifa previously purchased child seatdoes not fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 25: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

Placing a Child SeatThis page briefly summarizesHonda's recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your vehicle.

Front Passenger's SeatInfants: Never in the front seat, due

to the passenger airbag hazard.

Small children: Not recommended,due to the passenger's airbaghazard. If a small child must ridein front, move the vehicle seat tothe rear-most position and securea front-facing child seat with theseat belt, (see page 30 ).

Back SeatsInfants: Recommended positions.

Secure a rear-facing child seatwith the seat belt, (see page 26).

Small children: Recommendedpositions. Secure a front-facingchild seat with the seat belt, (seepage 30).

Driver and Passenger Safety

CONTINUED

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

The passenger's airbag inflateswith enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child's head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 26: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

Installing a Child SeatAfter selecting a proper child seat,and a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

1. Secure the child seat to the carwith a seat belt. Al l child seatsmust be secured to the car withthe lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.A child whose seat is not properlysecured to the car can beendangered in a crash. See pages26 and 30 for instructions on howto secure child seats in this car.

2. Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured. After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers, as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

However, a child seat does not needto be "rock solid." In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or forward-and-backwardmovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat'seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

3. Secure the child in the child seat.Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker'sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat andbe seriously injured in a crash.

Storing a Child SeatWhen you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the vehicle duringa crash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 27: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat TypeTo provide proper support for ababy's head, neck and back, infantsup to about one year of age must berestrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

We recommend that an infant stay ina rear-facing child seat as long aspossible, until they reach the seatmaker's weight or height limit andare able to sit up without support.

Infant Seat PlacementIn this vehicle, a rear-facing childseat can be placed in any seatingposition in the back seat, but not inthe front seat.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat. If the passenger'sairbag inflates, it can hit the back ofthe child seat with enough force tokill or seriously injure an infant. If aninfant must be closely watched, werecommend that another adult sit inthe back seat with the baby.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position. If aninfant faces forward, they could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if theairbags inflate.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 28: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

Infant Seat InstallationThe lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure a rear-facing child seat with this type ofseat belt.

1. With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker'sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

2. To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

3. After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 29: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

4. After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

5. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

Infant Seat Installation Tips

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby'sdoctor or follow the seat maker'srecommendations.

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown above.

Driver and Passenger Safety

CONTINUED

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 30: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended (see page 10). Or itmay prevent them from locking theirseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page 11).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Youmay also wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

Additional Precautions for InfantsNever hold a baby on your lap. Ifyou are not wearing a seat belt in acrash, you could be thrownforward into the dashboard andcrush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thebaby can be torn from your arms.For example, if the vehicle crashesinto a parked vehicle at 30 mph(48 km/h), a 20 Ibs (9 kg) babywill become a 600 Ibs (275 kg)force, and you will not be able tohold it.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a baby. During acrash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause very serious injuries.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 31: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat TypeA child who can sit up withoutsupport, and who fits within the childseat maker's weight and heightlimits, should be restrained in aforward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until they reach the weightor height limit for the seat.

Child Seat PlacementIn this vehicle, the best place toinstall a forward-facing child seat isin one of the seating positions in theback seat.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger airbag can behazardous. If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child's head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating passenger's airbag canstrike the child with enough force tocause very serious or fatal injuries. Ifa small child must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thatthe child is properly strapped in theseat.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the airbags inflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 32: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

Child Seat InstallationThe lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

1. With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker's instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

2. To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

3. After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 33: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

4. After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat while pulling up on thebelt.

5. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

Additional Precautions for SmallChildren

Never hold a small child on yourlap. If you are not wearing a seatbelt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, if thevehicle crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a30 Ibs (14 kg) child will become a900 Ibs (410 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold it.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child. During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause very serious injuries.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 34: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

Protecting Larger ChildrenWhen a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

If a child is too short for the shoulderpart of the belt to properly fit, werecommend that the child use abooster seat until they are tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for childrenwho must sit in the front seat.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

To determine whether a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child,first have the child put on the seatbelt, following the instructions onpage 13. Then check how the beltfits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child's collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, asshown above, the child is largeenough to wear the seat belt.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if theairbags inflate.

If a larger child must sit in front,they should move the seat asfar back as possible and weartheir seat belt properly.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 35: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

However, if the belt touches orcrosses the child's neck, the childneeds to use a booster seat.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross their neck. This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind their backor under their arm. This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance of achild sliding under the belt and beinginjured in a crash.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt. Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort, or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof seat belts and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt. If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Using a Booster Seat

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a style thatallows the child to use the lap/shoulder belt directly, without ashield, as shown above.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker's instructions.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 36: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

A child may continue using abooster seat until the tops of theirears are even with the top of theseat-back. When a child reaches thisheight, they should be tall enough touse the lap/shoulder belt without abooster.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontThe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that allchildren ages 12 and under ride inthe back seat, properly restrained.

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

In addition, the passenger's airbagposes serious risks to children. If theseat is too far forward, or the child'shead is thrown forward during acollision, or the child is unrestrainedor out of position, an inflating airbagcan kill or seriously injure the child.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

Physical SizePhysically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over their hips, chest,and shoulder (see page 13). If theseat belt does not fit properly, thechild should not sit in the front.

MaturityTo safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing theirseat belt properly throughout a ride.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 37: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner's manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight withtheir back against the seat andtheir feet on or near the floor.

Check that the child's seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Closely supervise the child. Evenmature children sometimes needto be reminded to fasten their seatbelt or sit properly.

Using Child Seats with TethersYour car has three attachment pointson the rear shelf for securing atether-style child seat to the car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (Tethers are required inCanada. U.S. owners may check withthe child seat maker to determinewhether a tether is available for aparticular child seat.)

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 38: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

U.S. Models

Locate the attachment points bylooking in the trunk at the undersideof the rear shelf. Select theattachment point you want to use.Take a thin, pointed object, such asan awl or ice pick, insert it into thatattachment point, and poke a markerhole in the rear shelf fabric.

Working from inside the car, use arazor blade to cut a 7/8 inch (22mm) diameter hole in the fabric atthe marker hole you punched.

To attach the tether to the vehicle,you need to purchase the anchorplate and mounting hardware fromyour Honda dealer (Part Number82410-SE3-C01).

To attach the tether to the child seat,follow the child seat maker'sinstructions.

Canadian Models

Select the attachment point you wantto use and remove the plug with asmall flat-tipped screwdriver orfingernail file.

Install the tether hardware that camewith the child seat.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 39: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Protecting Children

When installing tether hardware,make sure the toothed washer is onthe bottom of the bolt. Tighten thebolt to:16 lbf.ft (22 N.m, 2.2 kgf.m)

If a torque wrench was not used, seeyour Honda dealer as soon aspossible to verify proper installation.

To attach the tether to the child seat,follow the child seat maker'sinstructions.

If you are not sure how to install thetether, or you need mountinghardware, contact your Honda dealer.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 40: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System ComponentsYour seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions.

The system also includes alight on the instrument

panel to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your belts. Ifthe driver's seat belt is not fastenedbefore the ignition is turned ON (II),the light will come on and a beeperwill also sound. The beeper will stopafter a few seconds, but the light willstay on until the driver's seat belt isfastened.

Lap/Shoulder Belt

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips.To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of the

way and will not get closed in thedoor.

Al l seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During acollision or sudden stop, theretractor automatically locks the beltto help restrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver's have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages 26 and 30 for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow apassenger to move freely.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 41: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page 12 for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

Seat Belt MaintenanceFor safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

U.S. OwnersHonda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Honda will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use.Please see your Honda WarrantyInformation booklet for details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,you should have your dealer inspectthe belt, and replace it if necessary.A belt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page 263 .

Driver and Passenger Safety

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 42: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Additional Information About Your SRS

SRS ComponentsYour Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Two frontal airbags. The driver'sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger's airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked"SRS".

Sensors that can detect a severefrontal collision.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors thesensors, control unit, the airbagactivators, and all related wiringwhen the ignition is ON (II).

An indicator light on theinstrument panel to alert you to apossible problem with the system(see page 42).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle's electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

How Your Airbags Work

If you ever have a severe frontalcollision, the sensors will detectrapid deceleration and signal thecontrol unit to instantly inflate theairbags.

During a crash, your seat belt helpsrestrain your lower body and torso.Your airbag provides a cushion tohelp restrain and protect your headand chest.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 43: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Additional Information About Your SRS

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

After inflating, the airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won'tinterfere with the driver's visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag's surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

U.S. OwnersFor additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags, that came with yourowner's manual.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 44: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Additional Information About Your SRS

How Your SRS Indicator LightWorks

The purpose of the SRSindicator light is to alert

you to a potential problem with yourSupplemental Restraint System.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light up brieflythen go out. This tells you that thesystem is working properly.

However, if the light comes on at anyother time, you should have yoursystem checked by your dealer. Forexample:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

• If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,your airbags may not deploy whenyou need them. See your Hondadealer as soon as possible.

SRS ServiceYour Supplemental Restraint Systemis virtually maintenance-free, andthere are no parts you can safelyservice. However, you must haveyour vehicle serviced if:

Your airbags ever innate. Theairbags and the control unit mustbe replaced. Do not try to removeor replace the airbags yourself.This must be done by a Hondadealer or a knowledgeable bodyshop.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem. Take your vehicle toan authorized Honda dealer assoon as possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

Driver and Passenger Safety

S R S

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags do notinflate when needed.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 45: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Additional Information About Your SRS

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags. Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection in a severe frontalcollision.

Do not tamper with SRScomponents or wiring for anyreason. Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page 162 for further informationand precautions relating to your SRS.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 46: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your vehicle's exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged the under-side.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle'sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

1. Push the button.2. Select the mode.3. Turn the fan on high speed.4. Set the temperature control to a

comfortable setting.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 47: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Safety Labels

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Honda dealerfor a replacement.

DASH BOARDU.S. models only

SUN VISORU.S. models

Driver and Passenger Safety

RADIATOR CAP

Canadian models

HOOD

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 48: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Instruments and Controls

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

Control Locations............................ 48Indicator Lights................................ 49Gauges.............................................. 54

Speedometer................................ 54Tachometer.................................. 54Odometer...................................... 54Trip Meter.................................... 55Temperature Gauge.................... 55Fuel Gauge................................... 55Maintenance Required

Indicator.................................... 56Controls Near the Steering

Wheel....................................... 57Headlights.................................... 58Automatic Lighting Off

Feature...................................... 59Daytime Running Lights............. 59Instrument Panel Brightness..... 59Turn Signals................................. 60

Windshield Wipers...................... 60Windshield Washers................... 62Hazard Warning.......................... 62Rear Window Defogger.............. 62Steering Wheel Adjustment....... 63

Steering Wheel Controls ................ 64Cruise Control.............................. 64Remote Audio Controls .............. 66

Keys and Locks................................ 67Keys............................................. 67Immobilizer System..................... 68Ignition Switch............................. 69Door Locks................................... 70Power Door Locks....................... 71Remote Transmitter.................... 72Childproof Door Locks............... 76Trunk............................................ 76Glove Box..................................... 77

Homelink Universal Transmitter... 78Important Safety Precautions.... 78Training the Transmitter............ 78Training With a Rolling Code

System...................................... 80Erasing Codes.............................. 81

Seat Adjustments............................. 82Front Seat Adjustments.............. 82

Driver's Seat Manual HeightAdjustment............................... 83

Driver's Seat Power HeightAdjustment............................... 83

Driver's Seat Full PowerAdjustments............................. 84

Driver's Lumbar Support............ 85Head Restraints........................... 86Folding Rear Seat........................ 87Rear Seat Armrest....................... 88Trunk Pass-through Cover......... 89

Seat Heaters..................................... 90Power Windows............................... 91Moonroof.......................................... 92Mirrors.............................................. 93

Adjusting the Power Mirrors..... 94Parking Brake................................. 95Digital Clock..................................... 96Console Compartment.................... 97Coin Box........................................... 97Beverage Holder.............................. 98Sun Visor........................................... 99Vanity Mirror................................... 99Sunglasses Holder......................... 100Accessory Power Socket.............. 100Interior Lights................................ 101

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 49: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Control Locations

MIRRORCONTROLS(P.94)

Instruments and Controls

DOOR LOCKSWITCH(P.70)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.91)

DIGITAL CLOCK(P.96)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROL(P.104)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.119)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P.156)

FUEL FILL DOOR/TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE(P.76. 154)

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 50: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Indicator Lights

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

Lamp CheckThese indicator lights come on whenyou turn the ignition switch ON (II),allowing you to see that they areworking:

SRS IndicatorMalfunction Indicator LampCharging System IndicatorLow Oil Pressure IndicatorAnti-lock Brake System IndicatorSeat Belt Reminder LightD4 LampImmobilizer System IndicatorMaintenance Required IndicatorBrake System IndicatorDoor and Brake Lamp Monitor

If an indicator does not light duringthis test, it cannot alert you if thatsystem develops a problem. Have thedealer check your vehicle forburned-out bulbs or other problems.

* The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian modelare noted in the text.

Instruments and Controls

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR*

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR*

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR LOW FUELINDICATOR

SEAT BELTREMINDERLIGHTCHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP DOOR AND BRAKE LAMP MONITOR

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 51: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Indicator Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Light

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

Low Oil PressureIndicator

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page 281.

Charging SystemIndicator

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page 282 .

U.S. Parking Brake andBrake System Indicator

This light has two functions:

1. It lights as a reminder that youhave not released the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake applied can damage thebrakes and tires.

2. If it remains lit after you releasethe parking brake while the engineis running, or comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page 284 .

Instruments and Controls

Canada

BRAKE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 52: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Indicator Lights

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a problem in thesupplemental restraint system. Forcomplete information, see page 42.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

See page 283.

U.S. Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Only on cars equipped with ABS (seepage 180)This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With the light on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock.

Door and Brake Lamp Monitor

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the trunk or any dooris not closed tightly. If a brake lightdoes not work, the BRAKE LAMPindicator comes on when you pushthe brake pedal with the ignitionswitch ON (II).A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.All the lights in the monitor displaycome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch ON (II).

Instruments and Controls

Canada

S R SA B S

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 53: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Indicator Lights

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page 250 ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signalling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the vehicle should flash.

"Daytime RunningLights" Indicator

Canadian models onlyThis indicator lights when you turnthe ignition to ON (II) with theheadlight switch off and the parkingbrake set. It should go off if you turnon the headlights or release theparking brake. If it comes on at anyother time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

High Beam Indicator

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page 58 forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page 59 ).

Cruise Control Indicator

Only on cars equipped with CruiseControl SystemThis lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page 64 for informationon operating the cruise control.

Low Fuel Indicator

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

Instruments and Controls

D R L

CRUISECONTROL

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 54: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Indicator Lights

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage 68).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

Washer Level Indicator

Canadian models onlyThis light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page 218).

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 55: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Gauges

SpeedometerU.S. ModelsThis shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

Canadian ModelsThis shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

TachometerThe tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

OdometerThe odometer shows the total dis-tance your vehicle has been driven.It measures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under federal law (in theU.S.) and provincial regulations (inCanada) to disconnect, reset, or alterthe odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

Instruments and Controls

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATUREGAUGE

MAINTENANCEREQUIRED INDICATOR

TRIP METER ODOMETER TRIP METERRESET BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 56: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Gauges

Trip MeterThis meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters. Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Select/Reset button repeatedly. Each tripmeter works independently, so youcan keep track of two differentdistances.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to"0.0". Both trip meters will reset ifthe vehicle's battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

Temperature GaugeThis shows the temperature of theengine's coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to nearthe upper grey zone. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page 279 forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine's coolingsystem.

Fuel GaugeThis shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the vehicleis on level ground. It may showslightly more or less than the actualamount when you are driving oncurvy or hilly roads.

4-cylinder modelsThe gauge stays at the same fuellevel reading after you turn off theignition. When you add fuel, thegauge slowly changes to the newreading after you turn the ignitionswitch back ON (II).

6-cylinder modelsThe needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 57: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Required Indicator

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in for sched-uled maintenance.Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages 196 — 200.

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Press and hold the select/resetbutton in the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

3. Hold the button for about ten sec-onds, until the indicator resets.

Instruments and Controls

Gauges

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

SELECT/RESET BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 58: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof and cruisecontrol.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

* To use the horn, press the padaround the "H " logo.

Instruments and Controls

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

MOONROOFSWITCH

CRUISECONTROL

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

TILT ADJUSTMENT HORN HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 59: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Headlights

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to theposition turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver's door.

To change between low beams andhigh beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page 52).

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 60: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureOn EX and EX-V6 modelsThe Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, parkinglights, taillights, side marker lights,rear license plate lights andinstrument panel lights within 15seconds of closing the driver's door.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver's door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver's dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 61: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Turn Signals

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

Windshield Wipers

The right lever controls the wind-shield wipers and washers. Therotary switch at the end of the leverhas three positions:

INT: intermittent: low speed: high speed

Instruments and Controls

TURN SIGNAL LEVER

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 62: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. In low speed and high speed,the wipers run continuously.

On all models except DXYou can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring next to the rotaryswitch.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 krn/h).

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 63: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Windshield Washers

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you'repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

Hazard Warning

Push the red button to the left of theclock to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light abovethe button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 64: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentSee page 14 for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

1. Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

2. Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

3. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

4. Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Instruments and Controls

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 65: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Steering Wheel Controls

Cruise ControlExcept for DX model in the U.S.Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the vehicle underthose conditions.

Using the Cruise Control

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH

1. Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

2. Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Instruments and Controls

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 66: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Steering Wheel Controls

3. Press and hold the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel untilthe CRUISE CONTROL light onthe instrument panel comes on.This shows the system is nowactivated.The cruise control may not holdthe set speed when you are goingup and down hills.When climing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Changing the Set SpeedYou can increase the set cruisingspeed in either of two ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The vehicle willaccelerate slowly. When you reachthe desired cruising speed, releasethe button.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in either of two ways:

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The vehicle will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/decel button. The vehicle will thenmaintain the desired speed.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

RESUME/accel

CANCEL

SET/decel

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 67: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Steering Wheel Controls

Cancelling the Cruise ControlYou can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thevehicle will begin to slow down. Youcan use the accelerator pedal in thenormal way. The system remembersthe previously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) and pressthe RESUME/accel button until theCRUISE CONTROL light comes on.The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to Using theCruise Control.

Remote Audio Controls

On EX-V6 modelThese buttons let you control somefunctions of the audio system with-out removing your hands from thewheel. Refer to page 149 for a com-plete explanation.

Instruments and Controls

AUDIO/CHBUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 68: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

Keys

Your vehicle comes with two kindsof keys: a master key and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle:

IgnitionDoorsTrunkGlove boxTrunk release handleTrunk pass-through coverRear seat trunk access

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk, trunk release handle,trunk pass-through cover, rear seattrunk access and glove box lockedwhen you leave your vehicle andvalet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber plate with your keys. Youwill need this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe plate stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Remote TransmitterSome models also come with tworemote transmitters; see page 72 foran explanation of the operation.

Instruments and Controls

KEYNUMBERPLATE

MASTERKEY(BLACK)

VALETKEY(GREY)

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 69: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

Immobilizer SystemThe Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. A properly-coded ignition key must be used inthe ignition switch for the engine tostart. If an improperly-coded key (orother device) is used, the engine'sstarting circuit is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize thekey's coding if any otherimmobilizer key is near the ignitionswitch. To make sure the system

recognizes the key code, keep eachimmobilizer key on a separate ring.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

This indicator will also blink severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (ID to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.This device complies with DOC rules inCanada.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 70: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

Ignition Switch

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:

LOCK (0)ACCESSORY (I)ON (II)START (III)

LOCK (0) — You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your vehiclehas an automatic transmission, itmust also be in Park. The anti-theftlock will lock the steering columnwhen you remove the key.If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 71: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

ACCESSORY (I) — In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power socket.

ON (II) — This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the vehicle areusable. Several of the lights on theinstrument panel come on as a testwhen you turn the ignition switchfrom ACCESSORY to ON (see page49).

START (III) — Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key's coding (see page68).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver's door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock.

Instruments and Controls

Door Locks

LOCK TAB

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 72: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

To lock any passenger's door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down and close the door. Tolock the driver's door, pull theoutside door handle and push thelock tab down. Release the handle,then close the door.

The front doors can be locked andunlocked from the outside with thekey.

Power Door Locks

On all models except DXEach front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the switchdown to lock all doors, and up tounlock them.

To lock any passenger's door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab in and close the door. Tolock the driver's door, pull theoutside door handle and push thelock tab in or push the master switchdown. Release the handle, then closethe door.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in eitherfront door. To unlock only the driver'sdoor from the outside, insert the keyin the driver's door lock, turn the keyand release it. If you turn the keyand hold it, all doors will unlock. Allfour doors will unlock when youunlock the passenger's door with thekey.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 73: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

Lockout PreventionIf you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver'sdoor. With the driver's door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver'sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger's door will lock bothdoors. If you try to lock an opendriver's door by pushing in the locktab, the tabs on all doors pop out.Pushing in the lock tab on thepassenger's door only locks that door.

On EX and EX-V6 modelsYou can lock and unlock your vehiclewith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorslock. The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash once.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver's door unlocks.The remaining doors unlock whenyou push the button a second time.The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash twice.

The ceiling light ( i f the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do notopen any door, the light stays on forabout 10 seconds, then fades out. Ifyou relock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 10 seconds haveelapsed, the light wil l go offimmediately.

Instruments and Controls

Remote Transmitter

LOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

LEO

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 74: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

You cannot lock or unlock the doorswith the remote transmitter if anydoor is not fully closed or the key isin the ignition switch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, the hornwill sound once to verify that thesecurity system will be set.

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

The trunk will not open if the key isin the ignition switch.

Panic ModePanic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your vehicle's securitysystem to attract attention. Whenactivated, the horn will sound, andthe exterior lights will flash, forabout 30 seconds. To activate panicmode, press and hold the PANICbutton for about one second.

To cancel PANIC mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch toACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if thekey is in the ignition switch.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 75: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

Replacing the BatteryWhen the remote transmitter'sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors, and theLED will not light. Replace thebattery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, pry the twoparts of the transmitter apart.

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same (+ sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

Instruments and Controls

BATTERY

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 76: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with DOC rules inCanada.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

Transmitter CareAvoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your vehicle'ssystem by your Honda dealer. Anyother transmitters you have will alsoneed to be reprogrammed.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 77: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

Childproof Door Locks

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

Trunk

You can open the trunk in threeways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver's seat.Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.Press the trunk release button onthe remote transmitter (EX andEX-V6 models only).

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page 165 for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See CarbonMonoxide Hazard on page 44.

Instruments and Controls

LEVER

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE MASTER KEY

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 78: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Keys and Locks

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

1. Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key. Also makesure the trunk pass-through coveris locked (see page 89).

2. Give the person the valet key.

Glove Box

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the instrument panel lights areon.

Instruments and Controls

MASTER KEY

GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 79: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Homelink Universal Transmitter

On EX-V6 model onlyThe Homelink® Universal Transmit-ter built into your vehicle can beprogrammed to operate remotely-controlled devices around your home,such as garage doors, lighting, orhome security systems. It canreplace up to three remotetransmitters.

Customer AssistanceIf you have problems with trainingthe Homelink® UniversalTransmitter, or would likeinformation on home products thatcan be operated by the transmitter,call (800) 355-3515.

Important Safety PrecautionsAlways refer to the operating instruc-tions and safety information thatcame with your garage door openeror other equipment you intend tooperate with the Homelink®

Universal Transmitter. If you do nothave this information, you should

contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

While training or using thetransmitter, make sure you have aclear view of the garage door or gate,and that no one will be injured by itsmovement.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to program theHomelink® Universal Transmitter tooperate it. Garage door openersmanufactured before that date do nothave a safety feature that causes themto stop and reverse if an obstacle isdetected during closing, increasing therisk of injury. If you have questions,call (800) 355-3515.

Training the Transmitter

Before you can use the Homelink®

Universal Transmitter to operatedevices around your home, it must"learn" the proper codes. Forexample, to train the transmitter toopen and close the garage door:

1. Perform this step before trainingthe transmitter for the very firsttime. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the red light in the

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 80: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Homelink Universal Transmitter

transmitter flashes (approximately20 seconds). Release the buttons.

2. Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control against theHomelink® transmitter. Make sureyou are not blocking your view ofthe red light in the transmitter.

3. Select the transmitter button youwant to train.

4. Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button on thetransmitter at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

5. The red light in the transmittershould begin flashing. It will flashslowly at first, then rapidly.

6. When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. Thetransmitter should have learnedthe code from the remote control.

7. Test the transmitter button bypushing it. It should operate thegarage door.

8. Repeat these steps to train theother two transmitter buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

Canadian Owners: The remote controlyou are training from may stop trans-mitting after two seconds. This is notlong enough for the Homelink®

transmitter to learn the code.Release and press the button on theremote control every two secondsuntil the transmitter has learned thecode.

The Homelink® transmitter storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainthe transmitter if your vehicle'sbattery goes dead or is disconnected.

Retraining a ButtonTo train an already programmedtransmitter button to operate a newdevice:

1. Select the transmitter button youwant to train.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 81: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Homelink Universal Transmitter

2. Press and hold the transmitterbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

3. While continuing to hold thetransmitter button, place theremote control for the deviceagainst the Homelink®

transmitter.

4. Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

5. Release both buttons. Thetransmitter should now be trainedto operate the device.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystemFor security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a "rolling"or variable code. If you know thatyour garage door opener has arolling code, or you have beenunable to train the transmitter afterseveral attempts, use the followingprocedure. You will need someone tohelp you.

1. Find the "Training" button on yourgarage door opener motor/controlunit. The location will vary,depending on the manufacturer.The manufacturer'sdocumentation may help.

2. Press the Training button on themotor/control unit until the lightnext to the button starts flashing,then release it.

Instruments and Controls

TRAINING BUTTON

GARAGE DOOROPENER MOTOR/CONTROL UNIT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 82: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Homelink Universal Transmitter

3. Press and hold the desired buttonon the Homelink® transmitter untilthe training light on the motor/control unit stops flashing andremains lit.

4. Release the Homelink®

transmitter button, then press itagain. This should turn off thetraining light on the motor/controlunit.

5. Release the transmitter button.

6. Press the transmitter button again.It should operate the garage door.

Erasing CodesTo erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with DOC rules inCanada.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 83: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Seat Adjustments

All V-6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior have apower adjustable driver's seat.

The 4-cylinder EX model withoutleather interior has a power seatbottom height adjustment. Al l otherseat adjustments in this model aremanual.

The 4-cylinder DX and LX modelshave manual seat adjustments (seenext column).

The front passenger's seat in allAccord models adjusts manually.

Front Seat Adjustments

See pages 10 — 11 for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.Adjust the seat before you startdriving.To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion's front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch inthe new position.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 84: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Seat Adjustments

Driver's Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

On LX modelThe height of your driver's seat isadjustable. Turn the front dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe front of the seat bottom and turnthe rear dial to raise the rear.

Driver's Seat Power HeightAdjustment

On EX modelThe height of your driver's seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 85: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Seat Adjustments

Driver's Seat Full PowerAdjustmentsOn all V-6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior

See pages 10 — 11 for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

The two power seat adjustmentswitches are on the outside edge ofthe seat bottom. The horizontalswitch adjusts the seat bottom inseveral directions. The short verticalswitch adjusts the seat-back angle.

You can adjust the seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall adjustments before you startdriving.

Push the horizontal switch forwardor backward to adjust the distance tothe steering wheel and pedals.

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom'sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 86: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Seat Adjustments

Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move.

Driver's Lumbar Support

On EX and EX V-6 modelsVary the lumbar support by movingthe lever on the right side of theseat-back. Pivot the lever forwarduntil it stops, then let it return. Doingthis several times adjusts the lumbarsupport through its full range.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 87: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Seat Adjustments

Head Restraints

See page 12 for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant's head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

The front head restraints adjust forheight. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. Do not attemptto adjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sidewaysand push the restraint down.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Instruments and Controls

RELEASE BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 88: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Seat Adjustments

Folding Rear Seat

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back can be released frominside the vehicle or inside the trunk.

To fold down the seat-back frominside the vehicle, insert the masterkey in the lock on the rear shelf.Turn the key clockwise, pull downthe top of the seat-back, then releasethe key.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe clip.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release loop underthe rear shelf.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the rear shelf. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

MASTER KEY

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 89: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Seat Adjustments

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are tied down.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See Carrying Cargo on page163.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See Carbon Monoxide Hazard onpage 44.

Rear Seat ArmrestOn all models except DX

The rear seat armrest is located atthe center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 90: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Seat Adjustments

Trunk Pass-through Cover

The cover behind the rear seatarmrest allows you to reach smallobjects in the trunk from the interior.

The pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open,especially if the trunk lid is also open.See Carbon Monoxide Hazard onpage 44.

Instruments and Controls

KNOB

LID

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 91: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Seat Heaters

On Canadian EX-V6 model and EXmodel with leather interiorBoth front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition must beON (II) to use them. Push the rightside of the switch, HI, to rapidly heatup the seat. After the seat reaches acomfortable temperature, select LOby pushing the left side of the switch.This will keep the seat warm.

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off. Toturn the heater off, push theopposite side of the switch lightly.The indicator will turn off.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat's temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 92: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Power Windows

On all models except U.S. DXYour vehicle's windows are electri-cally-powered. Turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II) to raise or lowerany window.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pushing the switch upand holding it.

The driver's door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passengers' win-dows, push down on the appropriateswitch and hold it down until thewindow reaches the desired position.To close the window, pull back onthe window switch. Release theswitch when the window gets to theposition you want.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

DRIVER'S WINDOWSWITCH

MAINSWITCH

Closing a power window on achild's hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your children areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 93: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Power Windows, Moonroof

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

AUTO — To open the driver'swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down and release it.The window automatically goes allthe way down. To stop the windowfrom going all the way down, pullback on the window switch briefly.

To open the driver's window onlypartially, push the window switchdown lightly and hold it. The windowwill stop as soon as you release theswitch.

The AUTO function only works tolower the driver's window. To raisethe window, you must pull back onthe window switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passengers' windows. With thisswitch off, the passengers' windowscannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect thedriver's window. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe vehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition ON (II) again before youcan raise or lower the windows.

Moonroof

On EX and EX V-6 modelsThe moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid backinto the roof. Use the switch underthe left dashboard vent to operatethe moonroof. The ignition switchmust be ON (II).

Instruments and Controls

MOONROOF SWITCH

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 94: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Moonroof, Mirrors

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button

To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch

To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch Release the switchwhen the moonroof gets to thedesired position. Make sureeveryone's hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition ON (II) for themoonroof to operate.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-freezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Instruments and Controls

TABNOTICE

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone's handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

CONTINUED

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 95: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

On all models except DXAdjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the driver'sdoor armrest:

1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

2. Move the selector switch to L(driver's side) or R (passenger'sside).

3. Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up or down.

4. When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can'tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Instruments and Controls

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 96: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Mirrors, Parking Brake

On all Canadian models except DXmodelThe outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionON (II), turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The light in thebutton comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page 50).

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles.

Instruments and Controls

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 97: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Digital Clock

The digital clock displays the timewith the ignition switch in anyposition.To set the clock:

1. Press and hold the H button untilthe hour advances to the desiredtime.

2. Press and hold the M button untilthe numbers advance to thedesired time.

You can use R to quickly set the timeto the nearest hour. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.For example:

1:06 would RESET to 1: 00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 98: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Console Compartment, Coin Box

Console Compartment

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lower lever and lift thelid.

To close, lower the lid and push itdown until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theupper lever and lift up the armrestpad.

Coin Box

The coin box is located under the airvent. To open the coin box, pull thebottom edge. Close it with a firmpush.

Instruments and Controls

LEVER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

LEVER

COIN BOX

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 99: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Beverage Holder

To open the beverage holder, pushon the top. The beverage holder lidis spring-loaded and will swing open.To close it, push it down until itlatches.

Use the beverage holder only whenthe vehicle is parked. If you placecups in the holder while driving, theliquid may spill when you go overbumps or around corners.

The inner liner can be removed ifyou want to hold a larger cup.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

On all models except DX modelThe rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

Instruments and Controls

Push

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 100: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle. Do not usethe sun visor extension over thefront windshield.

Vanity Mirror

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

All models except the DX modelhave lighted vanity mirrors.

The light beside the mirror comeson only when the parking lights areon.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 101: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Sunglasses Holder, Accessory Power Socket

Sunglasses Holder

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

Accessory Power Socket

To use the accessory power socket,pull out on the cover. The ignitionswitch must be in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II).

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

It will not power an automotive typecigarette lighter element.

Instruments and Controls

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 102: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Interior Lights

Ceiling Light Spotlights

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open any door. In the ONposition, the ceiling light stays oncontinuously.On EX and EX- V6 modelsThe ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with theremote transmitter (see page 72). Thelight fades out after all doors areclosed.

On all models except DXTurn on the spotlight by pushing thebutton next to each light. Push thebutton again to turn it off. You canuse the spotlights at all times.

Courtesy Lights

On all models except DXEach door has a courtesy light. Thislight comes on when you open thedoor.Your vehicle also has a courtesy lightin the ignition switch. This lightcomes on when you open the driver'sdoor.It remains on for several secondsafter the door is closed.

Instruments and Controls

DOOR ACTIVATED

IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT

DOOR LIGHT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 103: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Comfort and Convenience Features

The heating and air conditioning*systems in your Honda provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

* Air conditioning is optional on theDX model.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them. (If you selected anoptional audio system, refer to theoperating instructions that camewith it.)

On EX, and EX-V6 modelsThe security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourHonda.

Heating and Cooling...................... 104What Each Control Does.......... 104How to Use the System............. 107To Turn Everything Off........... 110

Climate Control System................ 111Fully-automatic Operation........ 113Semi-automatic Operation........ 114Sunlight Sensor/

Temperature Sensor............. 118Audio System

(DX, LX and LX-V6).............. 119Operating the Radio.................. 120Adjusting the Sound.................. 123Operating the Cassette

Player...................................... 124Caring for Cassettes.................. 126Operating the Optional CD

Changer.................................. 127Protecting Compact Discs........ 129CD Changer Error

Indications.............................. 130

Audio System(EX and EX-V6) ..................... 131

Operating the Radio.................. 132Adjusting the Sound.................. 136Audio System Lighting............. 137Radio Frequencies..................... 137Radio Reception......................... 137Operating the CD Player.......... 139Operating the CD Changer...... 141Protecting Compact Discs........ 142CD Player Error Indications..... 143CD Changer Error

Indications.............................. 144Operating the Cassette

Player...................................... 145Tape Search Functions............. 146Caring for the Cassette

Player...................................... 148Remote Audio Controls............ 149Theft Protection........................ 150

Security System............................. 151

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 104: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Heating and Cooling

On LX, EX and LX-V6 modelsProper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for bestvisibility.If your vehicle does not have airconditioning, it can be installed atany time. Your dealer will install aGenuine Honda air conditioningsystem that meets Honda's highquality standards and is designed toexactly fit your vehicle. Pleasecontact your dealer for moreinformation.

What Each Control Does

Fan Control DialTurning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan's speed, which increases airflow.

Temperature Control DialTurning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonThis button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorabove the button lights when theA/C is on.

Rear Window Defogger ButtonThis button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page 62 ).

Recirculation ButtonThis button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the vehicle's interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).

Comfort and Convenience Features

FAN CONTROL DIAL MODE BUTTONS TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTONRECIRCULATION BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 105: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Heating and Cooling

Mode ButtonsUse the MODE buttons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.When you select orthe system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C,

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 106: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Heating and Cooling

Vent Controls

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust of air flow from the centervent, move the tab up-and-down andside-to-side.

On the driver's-side vent, move thevent up-and-down and move the tabside-to-side. On the passenger's-sidevent, move the tab up-and-down andmove the vent side-to-side.

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials underneath them.

Comfort and Convenience Features

CENTER VENT DRIVER'S-SIDE VENT PASSENGER'S-SIDE VENT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 107: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Heating and Cooling

How to Use the SystemThis section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the conditionclears.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

VentilationThe flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

1. Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.

2. Select and Fresh Air mode.3. Set the fan to the desired speed.

Comfort and Convenience Features

FAN CONTROL DIAL MODE BUTTONS TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTONRECIRCULATION BUTTON

CONTINUED

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 108: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the

button. The light above the buttonshould come on when a fan speedis selected.

2. Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is set to maximum cool.

3. Select4. If the outside air is humid, select

Recirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.

5. Set the fan to the desired speed.

If the interior is very warm frombeing parked in the sun, you can coolit down more rapidly by setting upthe controls this way:

1. Start the engine.2. Turn on the A/C by pressing the

button. Make sure the tempera-ture control dial is set to maximumcool.

3. Set the fan to maximum speed.4. Open the windows partially. Select

and Fresh Air mode.

When the interior has cooled downto a more comfortable temperature,close the windows and set thecontrols as described for normalcooling.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page55) when driving in stop-and-go

traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

Comfort and Convenience Features

FAN CONTROL DIAL MODE BUTTONS TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 109: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Heating and Cooling

To HeatTo warm the interior:

1. Start the engine.2. Select and Fresh Air mode.3. Set the fan to the desired speed.4. Adjust the warmth of the air with

the temperature control dial.

To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioningAir conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

1. Switch the fan on.2. Turn on the air conditioning.3. Select and Fresh Air mode.4. Adjust the temperature control

dial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To Defog and DefrostTo remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

1. Switch the fan on.2. Select

When you select thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

3. Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.

4. Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.When you switch to another modefrom the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 110: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Heating and Cooling

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the vehicle has been sitting outin cold weather:

1. Start the engine.2. Select

When you select thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

3. Switch the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up. You canclose the side vents with the dialunderneath each vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents.

For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

To Turn Everything OffTo shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

You should shut the systemcompletely off only for the first fewminutes of driving in cold weather,until the engine coolant warms upenough to operate the heater. Keepthe fan on at all other times so staleair does not build up in the interior.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 111: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Climate Control System

Only on EX-V6 modelThe automatic climate controlsystem in your Honda picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust of air flow from the centervent, move the tab up-and-down andside-to-side.On the driver's-side vent, move thevent up-and-down and move the tabside-to-side. On the passenger's-sidevent, move the tab up-and-down andmove the vent side-to-side.

The side vents can be opened andclosed with the dials underneaththem.

CENTER VENTS

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

DRIVER'S-SIDE VENT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 112: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

PASSENGER'S-SIDE VENT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 113: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Climate Control System

Fully-automatic OperationTo put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button and set thefan control dial to AUTO, then setthe desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial. You willsee FULL AUTO in the system'sdisplay. The light above the

button also goes on or off toshow you which mode, Recirculationor Fresh Air, is selected.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is set

between the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until thevehicle has been driven for a shorttime and the heater starts to developwarm air.

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

Comfort and Convenience Features

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

FULL AUTODISPLAY

FAN CONTROL DIAL

AUTO BUTTON OFF BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 114: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Climate Control System

Semi-automatic OperationYou can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL to go out.

Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonPress the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

Comfort and Convenience Features

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 115: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Climate Control System

Recirculation ButtonThis button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the vehicle's interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

Fan Control DialYou can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.When you turn the dial clockwise,the fan is taken out of automaticmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Turning the dial fullyclockwise increases the fan's speed,which increases air flow.

Mode ButtonUse the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Each timeyou press the MODE button, thedisplay shows the mode selected.Press the button four times to see allthe modes.

Some air will come out of the sidevents in all modes.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

MODE BUTTON FAN CONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 116: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Climate Control System

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 117: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Climate Control System

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you select the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

Rear Window Defogger ButtonThis button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page 62 ).

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 118: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Climate Control System

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Comfort and Convenience Features

TEMPERATURE SENSORSUNLIGHT SENSOR

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 119: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

AM/FM/Cassette Stereo AudioSystemFor DX, LX and LX-V6 modelsYour Honda's audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features DolbyB* noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO2)tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. "DOLBY" and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 120: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Operating the RadioThe ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob.Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

TUNE — Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the upper part ( ) to tuneto a higher frequency, or the lowerpart ( ) to tune to a lowerfrequency. The frequency numberswill start to change rapidly. Releasethe bar when the display reaches thedesired frequency. To change thefrequency in small increments, pressand release the TUNE bar quickly.

SEEK — The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pushthe SEEK switch up or down, thenrelease it. Depending on which wayyou push the switch, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 121: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

The SCAN function samples all thestations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.The system will scan up the band fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for approximately fiveseconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then scan for the nextstrong station and play that for fiveseconds. When it plays a station thatyou want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button again.

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FMBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

SEEK SWITCH TUNE BAR

CONTINUED

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 122: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Preset — You can store the fre-quencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and two on the FMband.

To store a frequency:

1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

2. Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

3. Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station's frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle's battery goes dead, isdisconnected or the radio fuse isremoved.

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FM BUTTON

SEEK SWITCH PRESETBUTTONS

TUNE BAR

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 123: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader — These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Treble/Bass — Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BAEANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are clone so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Radio Frequencies and ReceptionFor information, See page 137.

Comfort and Convenience Features

BASS/FADERCONTROL

TREBLE/BALANCECONTROL

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 124: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Operating the Cassette PlayerTurn the audio system ON. Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby B noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a cassette. If thetape was not recorded with Dolby Bnoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

Tape Search FunctionsWith a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

FF/REW — Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

SKIP — The Skip Function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To find the beginning ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, push the SKIP switch down.You will see REW flashing in thedisplay as the tape rewinds. To findthe beginning of the next song, pushthe SKIP switch up. You will see FFflashing in the display as the tapefast forwards. When the systemfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, it goes back to PLAY mode.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 125: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

REPEAT — The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

EJECT BUTTON CASSETTE SLOT TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

RPT BUTTON REWBUTTON

FFBUTTON

PLAY BUTTON

PROG BUTTON

DOLBY BUTTONSKIP BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 126: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of selection.

Caring for CassettesDamaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page 148 for information oncassette care and protection.

Comfort and Convenience Features

SKIP BUTTON DOLBY BUTTON

PROG BUTTON

PLAY BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON CASSETTE SLOT TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

RPT BUTTON REWBUTTON

FFBUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 127: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Operating the Optional CDChangerA Compact Disc changer is availablefrom your dealer. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate the CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.

Your dealer also has an accessory in-dash single CD player available thatis operated by the radio controls. Tooperate this unit, use the instructions(except for those relating to multiplediscs) in this section.

Using the instructions that camewith the changer, load the desiredCDs in the magazine, and load themagazine in the changer. Play onlystandard round discs. Odd-shapedCDs may jam in the drive or causeother problems.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FM BUTTON

TAPE/CD BUTTON RANDOM INDICATOR

REPEAT INDICATOR

PWR/VOL KNOB

RPT BUTTON

SKIP SWITCH

PRESET BUTTONS

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 128: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

To operate the CD changer or player,the ignition must be in ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) and the audio systemmust be on.

Press the CD button until "CD"appears in the display. The systemwill start to play the first track of thefirst disc in the magazine.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe magazine is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 — 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

You can use the SKIP switch toselect tracks within a disc. If youpush and release the SKIP switch,the system will move to thebeginning of a track. Push the switchup to move to the beginning of thenext track, and push the switchdown to move to the beginning ofthe current track.

If you push and hold the SKIP switch,you will hear a beep and the systemwill continue to move across tracks.Release the switch when you think ithas reached the desired place on thedisc.

REPEAT — When you activate theRepeat feature by pressing the RPTbutton, the system continuouslyreplays the current track. You willsee RPT in the display as a reminder.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

RANDOM PLAY — This feature,when activated, plays the tracks on aCD in random order, rather than inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand hold the RPT button until yousee RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play tracksrandomly on the current disc. Whenall tracks on that disc have beenplayed, the next disc is loaded andplayed randomly. This continuesuntil you deatctivate Random Play bypressing RPT again.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 129: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

If the system is in Repeat mode, youmust turn it off by pressing RPTbefore you can select Random Play.Then press the button again untilyou see RDM displayed.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or insert acassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode, play will continue at thesame disc and track.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same disc and trackwhen you turn it back on.

Protecting Compact DiscsFor information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page142 .

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FM BUTTON RANDOM INDICATOR

TAPE/CD BUTTON REPEAT INDICATOR

PRESET BUTTONS

SKIP SWITCH

RPT BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 130: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

CD Changer Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 131: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

AM/FM/CD Audio SystemFor EX and EX-V6 modelsYour Honda's audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The Anti-theft feature will disablethe system if it is disconnected fromthe car's battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page 150 ).

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 132: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Operating the RadioThe ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

Comfort and Convenience Features

PWR/VOL KNOB TUNE KNOB

FM BUTTON AM BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 133: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

SCAN — The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system wil l scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwi l l stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If youdo nothing, the system will thenscan for the next strong station andplay that for five seconds. When itplays a station that you want tocontinue listening to, press theSCAN button again.

Preset — You can store the fre-quencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and two on the FMband.

To store a frequency:

1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each Presetbutton.

2. Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

3. Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station's frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle's battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

TUNE — Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob clockwise to tune to ahigher frequency andcounterclockwise to tune to a lowerfrequency.

SEEK — The SEEK functionseaches the band for a station with astrong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ) thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 134: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

AUTO SELECT — If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals; It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a "0"displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

Comfort and Convenience Features

A. SEL BUTTON

A. SEL INDICATOR

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 135: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Comfort and Convenience Features

TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 136: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader — These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the fronl-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Treble/Bass — Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Comfort and Convenience Features

BASS/FADERCONTROL

TREBLE/BALANCECONTROL

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 137: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Audio System LightingYou can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage 59). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Radio FrequenciesYour Honda's radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as "FM101."

Radio ReceptionHow well your Honda's radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station's transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station's signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station's signal.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 138: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio's reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station's transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 139: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Operating the CD PlayerYou operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the system on, insert the discinto the CD slot. Push the disc inhalfway, the drive will pull it in therest of the way and begin to play.The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. In allcases, play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play that disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM orFM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Comfort and Convenience Features

FM BUTTON

CD SLOT SKIP BUTTONS

AM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON CD BUTTON RDM BUTTON

CONTINUED

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 140: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold an appropriate SKIP button.Press the button to move forward,or the button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

REPEAT— To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the Repeatbutton. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRepeat button again to turn it off.

RANDOM PLAY — This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 141: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Operating the CD Changer(Optional)A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your vehicle. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CD's in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 — 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the FM orAM button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 142: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Protecting Compact Discs

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, felt-tippens, and labels can cause the CD tonot play properly, or possibly jam inthe drive.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 143: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

CD Player Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 144: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

CD Changer Error IndicationsIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 145: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Operating the Cassette Player(Optional)The cassette system features DolbyB* noise reduction, automaticsensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO2)tape, and autoreverse for continuousplay.

Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. "DOLBY" and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

FM BUTTON CD/TAPE CHG BUTTON

REWBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

AM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON PROG BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS

NR BUTTON FF BUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 146: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

The t ape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby B noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a cassette. If thetape was not recorded with Dolby Bnoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the NR button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press the AMbutton, FM button, or CD/TAPE CHG button. To change backto the cassette player, push the CD/TAPE CHG button.

Tape Search FunctionsWith a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

FF/REW — Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 147: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

SKIP — The skip function allowsyou to find the begining of a song orpassage. To skip to the beginning ofa song or passage currently playing,push the button. You will seeREW flashing in the display as thetape rewinds. To skip to the begin-ning of the next song, push thebutton. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

REPEAT — The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the REPEATbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind.When it senses the beginning of thesame song or passage, the systemreturns to PLAY mode. It willcontinue to repeat this sameprogram until you deactivateREPEAT by pressing the buttonagain.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of selection.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 148: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Caring for the Cassette PlayerThe cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to 'degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 149: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Remote Audio Controls

On EX-V6 modelTwo controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The top and bottom buttons adjustthe volume up or downPress the proper button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The AUDIO/CH button has threefunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing acassette or CD.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe AUDIO/CH button to changestations. Each time you press thisbutton, the system advances to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. You will see thenumber of the selected Preset buttonin the display. To change bands,press the AM or FM button on theaudio system's front panel.

If you are playing a cassette, use theAUDIO/CH button to advance to thenext selection. You will see "FF"blinking in the display when youpress the'AUDIO/CH button. Thesystem fast forwards until it senses asilent period, then goes back toPLAY.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push theAUDIO/CH button. You will see thedisc and track number in the display.

Comfort and Convenience Features

AUDIO/CHBUTTON

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 150: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Audio System

Theft ProtectionOn EX and EX-V6 modelsYour vehicle's audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, the usermust enter a specific five-digit codein the Preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system's codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system's serial number inthis Owner's Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system's serial number.

If your vehicle's battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see "Code" in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the Presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code. Ifit is entered correctly, the radio willstart playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in three attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 151: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Security System

On EX and EX-V6 modelsThe security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for two minutes,then the system resets. To reset analarming system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock eitherfront door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system sets auto-matically fifteen seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and trunk. Forthe system to activate, you must lockthe doors from the outside with thekey, lock tab, door lock switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem light next to the driver's doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), orthe hood, will cause it to alarm. Italso alarms if the radio is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, orthe trunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Brake LampMonitor on the instrument panel(see page 51), to see if the doorsand trunk are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

Comfort and Convenience Features

SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 152: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

Break-in Period.............................. 154Gasoline.......................................... 154Service Station Procedures .......... 154

Filling the Fuel Tank................. 154Opening the Hood..................... 156

Oil Check................................ 157Engine Coolant Check.......... 159

Fuel Economy................................ 160Vehicle Condition...................... 160Driving Habits............................ 160

Accessories and Modifications.... 161Carrying Cargo.............................. 163

Before Driving

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 153: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Break-in Period, Gasoline, Service Station Procedures

Break-in PeriodHelp assure your vehicle's futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

GasolineYour Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your vehicle's emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

Filling the Fuel Tank

1. Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver's side of the vehicle, parkwith that side closest to theservice station pumps.

2. Open the fuel fi l l door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver's seat.

Before Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 154: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Service Station Procedures

3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuelpump automatically clicks off. Donot try to "top off" the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Your vehicle has an on-boardrefueling vapor recovery system tohelp keep fuel vapors from goinginto the atmosphere. If the fuelpump keeps clicking off eventhough the tank is not full, theremay be a problem with this system.Consult your dealer.

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks. If you donot properly tighten the cap, theMalfunction Indicator Lamp maycome on (see page 283).

6. Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Before Driving

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

FUEL FILL CAP

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 155: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Service Station Procedures

Opening the Hood

1. Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

2. Standing in front of the vehicle,put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood to the right ofcenter. Slide your hand to the leftuntil you feel the hood latchhandle. Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

4-cylinder models3. Pull the support rod out of its clip

and insert the end into the hole onthe front of the hood around thecenter.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Before Driving

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH SUPPORT ROD

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 156: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Service Station Procedures

6-cylinder models3. Lift the hood up most of the way.

The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Oil Check

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait afew minutes after turning the engineoff before you check the oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

CONTINUED

Before Driving

4-cylinder models DIPSTICK 6-cylinder models DIPSTICK

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 157: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Service Station Procedures

2. Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

4-cyUnder models

3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.

6-cylinder models

Before Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 158: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Service Station Procedures

4. Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see Adding Oil on page 206 .

Engine Coolant Check

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see AddingEngine Coolant on page 211 forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer to Owner MaintenanceChecks on page 203 for informationon checking other items in yourHonda.

Before Driving

RESERVE TANK MAX

4-cylinder models MIN 6-cylinder models MIN

MAX RESERVE TANK

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 159: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Fuel Economy

The condition of your vehicle andyour driving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Vehicle ConditionAlways maintain your vehicle accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.This will keep it in top operatingcondition.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the Owner MaintenanceChecks (see page 203 ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more "rolling resistance,"which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour vehicle's underside adds weightand rolling resistance. Frequentcleaning helps your fuel mileage andreduces the chance of corrosion.

Driving HabitsYou can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to"warm-up" a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of "cold starts," try tocombine several short trips into one.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

Before Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 160: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

AccessoriesYour dealer has Genuine Hondaaccessories that allow you topersonalize your vehicle. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your vehicle, and arecovered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they maynot meet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle'shandling and stability. (See"Modifications" on the next pagefor additional information.)

When properly installed, car phones,alarms, two-way radios, and low-powered audio systems should notinterfere with your vehicle'scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour vehicle's electrical systemcapacity, they can interfere with the

operation of your vehicle, or evencause the airbags to deploy.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page 286).

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Before Driving

improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle's handling, stability andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 161: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Accessories and Modifications

ModificationsDo not remove any originalequipment or modify your vehicle inany way that would alter its design oroperation. This could make yourvehicle unsafe and illegal to drive.

For example, do not make anymodifications that would change theride height of your vehicle, or installwheels and tires with a differentoverall diameter.

Such modifications can adverselyaffect handling, and interfere withthe operation of the vehicle's anti-lock brakes and other systems.

In addition, any modifications thatdecrease ground clearance increasethe chance of undercarriage partsstriking a curb, speed bump, or otherraised object, which could causeyour airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Additional Safety PrecautionDo not attach or place objects on theairbag covers. Any object attached toor placed on the covers marked "SRS,"in the center of the steering wheeland on top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle and hurtsomeone.

Before Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 162: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Carrying Cargo

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe front doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the backseat can be folded down to allow youto carry more cargo or longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle's handling, stability andoperation and make it unsafe. Beforecarrying any type of cargo, be sure toread the following pages.

Before Driving

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET GLOVE BOX

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 163: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Carrying Cargo

Load LimitThe maximum load for your vehicleis 850 Ib (395 kg).

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

Add up the weight of all occupants.

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

Subtract the total from 850 Ib (395kg).

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver's ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

Before Driving

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt ro killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 164: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a Crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetrunk, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page 44 .

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Hondadealer.

Before Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 165: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Driving

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed manual and automatictransmissions. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour vehicle, the braking system,and facts you need if you are plan-ning to tow a trailer.

Preparing to Drive......................... 168Starting the Engine........................ 169

Starting in Cold Weatherat High Altitude ..................... 170

5-speed Manual Transmission..... 170Recommended Shift Points...... 171Maximum Speeds.................... 172

Automatic Transmission.............. 172Shift Lever Position Indicator.. 173Shift Lever Positions................. 173Maximum Allowable Speeds.... 176Shift Lock Release..................... 176

Parking............................................ 178The Braking System...................... 179

Brake Wear Indicators.............. 179Brake System Design................ 180Anti-lock Brakes........................ 180

Important SafetyReminders.......................... 181

ABS Indicator......................... 181Driving in Bad Weather................ 182Towing a Trailer............................ 184

Driving

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 166: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Preparing to Drive

You should do the following checksand adjustments every clay beforeyou drive your vehicle.

1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

2. Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

3. Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

4. Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened clownsecurely.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat(see page 82).

6. Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage 93).

7. Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page 63).

8. Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

9. Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page 12 ).

10.Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

11. Start the engine (see page 169).

12. Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage 49) .

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 167: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Starting the Engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

3. Manual Transmission:Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Automatic Transmission:Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

4. Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

5. If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

6. If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 168: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Starting the Engine, 5-speed Manual Transmission

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

1. Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

2. Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

3. If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

5-speed Manual Transmission

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 169: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

5-speed Manual Transmission

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into Reverse, or shift intoone of the forward gears for amoment. This stops the gears sothey won't "grind".

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer's red zone in thelower gear. Refer to the MaximumSpeeds chart.

Recommended Shift PointsDrive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

Driving

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 170: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

5-speed Manual Transmission, Automatic Transmission

Maximum SpeedsThe speeds in this table are themaximums for the given gears. Ifyou exceed these speeds, the enginespeed wil l enter into thetachometer's red zone. If this occurs,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter inthe engine's computer controls. Theengine wil l run normally when youreduce the RPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure thevehicle wil l not exceed themaximum speed in the chart in thelower gear.

Automatic TransmissionYour Honda's transmission has fourforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a "lock-up" torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 171: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicator

This indicator between the fuelgauge and temperature gauge showswhich position the shift lever is in.The "D4" indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapid acceler-ation and have the transmissionchecked by an authorized Hondadealer as soon as possible.

Shift Lever Positions

The shift lever has seven positions.It must be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD4, D3, 2,1, N or R, press firmly onthe brake pedal, and keep your footoff the accelerator pedal.

CONTINUED

SHIFT LEVER

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 172: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Automatic Transmission

Park (P) — This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page176.

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Reverse (R) — To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Press the release buttonbefore shifting into Reverse fromNeutral.

Neutral (N) — Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the vehiclefor any reason. Press on the brake pe-dal when you are moving the shiftlever from Neutral to another gear.

Drive (D4) — Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up a t. higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 173: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Automatic Transmission

Drive (D3) —This position is similarto D4, except only the first threegears are selected. Use D3 whentowing a trailer in hilly terrain, or toprovide engine braking when goingdown a steep hill. D3 can also keepthe transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

For faster acceleration when in D3 orD4, you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down oneor two gears, depending on yourspeed.

Second (2) — To shift to Second,press the release button on the sideof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

First (1) — To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. With the leverin this position, the transmissionlocks in First gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D3 and D4

you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 174: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Automatic Transmission

Maximum Allowable SpeedsThe speeds in this table are themaximums for the given positions.If you exceed these speeds, theengine speed wi l l enter into thetachometer's red zone. If this occurs,you wil l feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter inthe engine's computer controls. Theengine wil l run normally when youreduce the RPM below the red zone.

4-cyIinder models

6-cylinder models Shift Lock ReleaseThis allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

1. Set the Parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 175: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Automatic Transmission

3. Place a cloth on the edge of theshift lever console outer frame.Remove the frame by carefullyprying on the edge with a smallflat-tipped screwdriver (notincluded in the tool kit).

4. Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

5. Push down on the key while youpress the release button and movethe shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

6. Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release. Reinstall the outerframe. Depress the brake pedaland restart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your Hondadealer.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 176: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Parking

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. The indicatoron the instrument panel shows thatthe parking brake is not fullyreleased; it does not indicate that theparking brake is firmly set. Makesure the parking brake is set firmlyor your vehicle may roll if it isparked on an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission — making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from the curb.If you have a manual transmission,put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turnthe front wheels toward the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Parking TipsMake sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.On EX and EX-V6 modelsCheck the indicator on the driver'sdoor to verify that the securitysystem is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 177: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

The Braking System

Your Honda is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on model. A power assisthelps reduce the effort needed onthe brake pedal.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Brake Wear IndicatorsThe front disc brakes on all vehicleshave audible brake wear indicators.They are also on the rear brakes ofcars equipped with ABS as standardequipment.When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic"screeching" sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible "screeching".

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 178: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

The Braking System

Brake System DesignThe hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Anti-lock BrakesAll V-6 models, and the EX modelhave an Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) as standard equipment. It isoptional on some of the other models.ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) helpsto prevent the wheels from lockingup and skidding during hard braking,allowing you to retain steeringcontrol.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the vehiclecontinues straight ahead eventhough you turn the steering wheel.The ABS helps to prevent lock-upand helps you retain steering controlby pumping the brakes rapidly; muchfaster than a person can do it.

You should never pump thebrake pedal, this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as"stomp and steer."

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal, it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Driving

Front

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 179: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

The Braking System

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle, it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking. You shouldalways maintain a safe followingdistance from other vehicles.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly, such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability. Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

ABS Indicator

The ABS is self-checking. It alsochecks itself whenever you use thebrakes.

CONTINUED

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 180: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

The Braking System, Driving in Bad Weather

If anything goes wrong, the ABSindicator on the instrument panelcomes on (see page 51). This meansthe anti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional systemwithout anti-lock, providing normalstopping ability. You should have thedealer inspect your vehicle as soonas possible.

Driving in Bad Weather

Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-quire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your vehicle well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in these condi-tions.

Driving Technique — Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your vehicle longerto react, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 181: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Driving in Bad Weather

Visibility — Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defrosters and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepage 109).

Traction — Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing "hydroplaning" (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. "Clear" roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 182: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Towing a Trailer

Your Honda is designed primarily tocarry passengers and their cargo.You can use it to tow a trailer if youcarefully observe some general rules.

The total weight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 Ibs (450 kg).

The "tongue load" should neverexceed 100 Ibs (45 kg). This is theamount of weight the trailer putson the hitch when it is fully-loaded.As a rule of thumb, the tongueload should be 10 percent of thetotal trailer package.For example, if the trailer and itsload weigh 500 Ibs (225 kg), thetongue load should be 50 Ibs (22.5kg). Adjust the trailer's cargo tochange the tongue load. Start byputting approximately 60 percentof the cargo toward the front and40 percent toward the rear. Neverload the trailer so the back isheavier than the front. This takesweight off your vehicle's rear axleand reduces traction.

The combined weight of thevehicle, all passengers and theirluggage, and tongue load must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating. The GVWR is printed onthe Certification label attached tothe driver's doorjamb (see page294).

The combined weight of thevehicle, all passengers and theirluggage, and tongue load alsomust not exceed the Gross AxleWeight Rating. The GAWR is alsoshown on the Certification label. Ittells you the maximum load for thefront and rear axles. It is possiblethat your towing package does notexceed the GVWR but doesexceed the GAWR. Impropertrailer loading, and/or too muchluggage in the trunk can overloadthe rear axle. Redistribute the loadand check the axle weights again.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 183: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Towing a Trailer

The best way to confirm that yourtotal towing package is within thesespecifications is to get it weighed.Load the vehicle and trailer as younormally would while towing, andtake them to a public scale. Havethem check the total weight and theweight at each axle, then comparethe weights to the specifications.

Trailer HitchesThe trailer hitch must be the propersize and construction for yourvehicle and the trailer you intend totow. Consult with an expert beforeyou purchase a trailer hitch, andhave it installed by a qualifiedmechanic.

The hitch should bolt to theunderbody of the vehicle, anddistribute the load over a wide area.Never use a hitch that mounts onlyto the rear bumper. The bumper isnot designed to handle that type ofload.

A trailer hitch that is not adequate forthe size of the trailer, or a hitch that isimproperly installed, can cause damageto the underside of your vehicle.

Driving

Improperly loading your vehicleand trailer can seriously affectits steering and brakingperformance, causing a crashin which you can be seriouslyinjured.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 184: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Towing a Trailer

MirrorsMany states and provinces have lawsrequiring special outside mirrorswhen you are towing a trailer. Checkthe laws in your area. You may wantto install mirrors, even if they are notrequired. Hook up the trailer and seehow much it obscures your ability tosee behind you with the standardmirrors. If you cannot see directlybehind you, or have a large blindspot next to the trailer or the vehicle,you should install mirrors intendedfor towing.

Connecting the TrailerMost trailers that have a grossweight of 1,000 Ibs (450 kg) do nothave their own braking system. Ifyou are thinking of getting a trailerthat does have brakes, make surethey are electrically-operated. Thereare no provisions in your vehicle totap into its hydraulic braking system.Any attempt to attach the trailer'sbrakes to your vehicle's hydraulicsystem, no matter how successful itmay seem, will lower brakingeffectiveness and create a potentialhazard.

Always use a safety chain whentowing a trailer. Connect the safetychain securely at both ends. Makesure the chain crosses under thetongue so it will catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack in the chain so it can't bind in asharp turn. Do not let it drag on theground.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 185: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector in the trunk. To use theconnector, remove the fastener onthe side of the trunk and pull thelining back (see page 252 ). Refer tothe drawing above for the wiringcolor code and purpose of eachconnector pin.

Since the lighting and wiring can bedifferent for various brands oftrailers, have a technician who isfamiliar with your trailer modify itslighting plug. A converter may berequired between the vehicle andtrailer for the lights to workcorrectly.

Before Starting OutAs you are preparing to tow yourtrailer, do the following:

Measure the trailer's tongue load.You can do this with a bathroomscale.Verify that the hitch and safetychain are securely fastened.Check the condition and airpressure of all tires on the trailerand your vehicle. Low tirepressure can seriously affect thehandling. Also check the spare tire.With everything loaded and thetrailer connected, check that therear of the vehicle is not sagging.If so, redistribute the load in thevehicle.Check that all lights on the vehicleand trailer are working properly.

Driving

GROUND(BLACK)

BACK-UP LlGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/BLUE)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 186: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Towing a Trailer

Towing SafetyYour vehicle will not stop as quicklywith a trailer in tow. Leave extradistance between your vehicle andother vehicles. Avoid braking orturning suddenly. This could causethe trailer to jackknife or possiblyturn over.

Keep in mind that your total vehicleis now much longer. Leave moreroom when making turns. The trailertracks a smaller arc than the vehicleand can hit or run over somethingthat the vehicle misses. Whenpassing another vehicle, make surethe trailer is clear before changinglanes.

The vehicle/trailer combination ismore affected by crosswinds andbuffeting. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. If there istoo much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's airturbulence.

Towing a trailer puts an extra loadon your vehicle. You should haveyour vehicle serviced according tothe "Maintenance Schedule undersevere driving conditions" on page165.

This extra load is magnified whenyou are driving in hilly terrain.Watch the temperature gaugeclosely when climbing hills. If it getsnear the hot area, turn off the airconditioning (if it is on). If this doesnot reduce the heat, it may benecessary to pull to the side of theroad and wait for the engine to cool.If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently between 3rd and 4thgears, put it in D3. This will helpprevent the transmission fromoverheating. Help keep the brakesfrom overheating by shifting to alower gear when going downhill.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 187: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Towing a Trailer

If you have to stop while going uphill,do not hold the vehicle in place bypressing on the accelerator. This cancause the automatic transmission tooverheat. Use the parking brake orfootbrake.

When parking your vehicle andtrailer, especially on a hill, be sure tofollow all the normal precautions.Turn your front wheels into the curb,set the parking brake firmly, and putthe transmission in 1st or Reverse(manual) or Park (automatic). Inaddition, place wheel chocks at eachof the trailer's tires.

Backing up with a trailer is difficultand takes practice. Drive slowly,make small movements with thesteering wheel, and have someonestand outside to guide you. Grip thesteering wheel on the bottom (ratherthan the usual position near the top).Move your hand to the left to get thetrailer to move to the left, and rightto move the trailer right.

Driving

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 188: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage 313 for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

Maintenance Safety....................... 192Important Safety Precautions.. 193

Maintenance Schedule.................. 194Maintenance Record..................... 201Owner Maintenance Checks........ 203Fluid Locations............................... 204Engine Oil....................................... 206

Adding Oil................................... 206Recommended Oil..................... 206Synthetic Oil............................... 208Additives..................................... 208Changing the Oil and Filter...... 208

Cooling System.............................. 211Adding Engine Coolant............. 211Replacing Engine Coolant........ 213

Windshield Washers..................... 218Transmission Fluid........................ 219

AutomaticTransmission.......................... 219

5-speed ManualTransmission.......................... 221

Brake and Clutch Fluid................. 222Brake System............................. 222Clutch System............................ 223

Power Steering............................... 223Air Cleaner Element...................... 224

Spark Plugs..................................... 227Replacement............................... 227Specifications............................. 228

Battery............................................ 231Wiper Blades.................................. 234Air Conditioning System............... 236Air Conditioning Filter.................. 237Drive Belts...................................... 237Timing Belt..................................... 238Tires................................................ 238

Inflation....................................... 239Inspection................................... 241Maintenance............................... 241Tire Rotation.............................. 242Replacing Tires and Wheels .... 242Wheels and Tires....................... 243Winter Driving........................... 244

Snow Tires.............................. 244Tire Chains............................. 244

Lights.............................................. 245Replacing Bulbs......................... 249

Storing Your Vehicle..................... 258

Maintenance

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 189: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Safety

Regularly maintaining your vehicle isthe best way to protect yourinvestment. Proper maintenance isessential to your safety and thesafety of your passengers. It will alsoreward you with more economical,trouble-free driving and help reduceair pollution.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Maintenance

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner'smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner'smanual.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 190: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety PrecautionsBefore you begin any maintenance,make sure your vehicle is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust. Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Burns from hot parts. Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Injury from moving parts. Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use anonflammable solvent, not gasoline,to clean parts. Keep cigarettes,sparks, and flames away from thebattery and all fuel-related parts.

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 191: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Schedule

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have yourvehicle serviced and what thingsneed attention. It is essential thatyou have your vehicle serviced asscheduled to retain its high level ofsafety, dependability, and emissionscontrol performance.

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourvehicle as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

Avoid exceeding your vehicle'sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your vehicle. Theload limit is shown on the label onthe driver's doorjamb.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page154).

Which Schedule to Follow:Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages. Select the schedulefor "Severe Conditions" if most ofyour driving is done under one ormore of the conditions listed on thatpage. Otherwise, follow the schedulefor "Normal Conditions."

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 192: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Schedule

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of GenuineHonda parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are "certified" to EPAstandards.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith # will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 193: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Schedule (Normal Conditions)

Follow the Normal MaintenanceSchedule if the severe drivingconditions specified in theSevere Conditions MaintenanceSchedule do not apply.

NOTE: If you onlyOCCASIONALLY drive under a"severe" condition, you shouldfollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

* 1 : Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 194: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C as required for each distance/time interval. Follow thisschedule if the severe driving conditions described in the Severe Conditions Schedule on the next page do not apply.Canadian owners: Follow the schedule for Severe Conditions.

# : See maintenance and emissions warranty info, last column, page195.

* 1 : See Timing Belt on page 238 to determine need for replacement.

* 2 : Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

Maintenance

page 242

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 195: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Schedule (Severe Conditions)

Maintenance

Follow the Severe MaintenanceSchedule if you drive yourvehicle MAINLY under one ormore of the following condi-tions:

Driving less than 5 miles (8km) per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving lessthan 10 miles (16 km) per trip.Driving in hot [over 90°F(32° C)] conditions.Extensive idling or longperiods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, or driving inmountainous conditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, orde-iced roads.

For Canadian OwnersFollow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

*

1 : Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder

models only.

*2: Refer to page 238 for replacement

information under special driving

conditions.

*3: Refer to page 237 for replacement

information under special driving

conditions.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 196: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)

Use this schedule if your vehicle is MAINLY driven in any of the following Severe Conditions, or normally driven in Canada; otherwise use the NormalSchedule. Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C, D as required for each distance/time.

Maintenance

CONTINUED

page 242

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 197: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)

# : See maintenance and emissions warranty info, last column, page195.

* 1 : See Timing Belt on page 238 to determine need for replacement.

*

2 : See Air Conditioning Filter on page 237 for information underspecial conditions.

* 3 : Balancer belt applies to 4-cylinder models only.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 198: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

You or the servcing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page 196 ) or severeconditions (page 198 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

Maintenance

CONTINUED

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 199: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 200: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Owner Maintenance Checks

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level — Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage 157.

Engine coolant level — Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fil l the fuel tank. See page 159 .

Windshield washer fluid — Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page 218 .

Automatic transmission — Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page219.

Brakes — Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page 222 .

Tires — Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page238.

Lights — Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage 245.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 201: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Fluid Locations

4-Cylinder Models

Maintenance

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed ManualTransmission only)(Gray cap)

ENGINE, OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 202: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Fluid Locations

6-Cylinder Models

Maintenance

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 203: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Engine Oil

Adding Oil

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and replace theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Recommended OilOil is a major contributor to yourengine's performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade deter-gent oil.

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 204: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Engine Oil

You can determine an oil's SAEviscosity and Service Classificationfrom the API Service label on the oilcontainer.

A fuel-efficient oil is recommendedfor your Honda. This is shown on theAPI Service label by the words"Energy Conserving". This oil isformulated to help your engine useless fuel.

The API Service label also tells youthe service classification of the oil.Always use an oil that is labeled "APIService SJ". This service rating mayinclude other classifications, such asCD. These additional classificationsare not a problem, as long as thelabel also carries the SJ classification.

The oil container may also displaythe API Certification mark. Makesure it says "For Gasoline Engines."

CONTINUED

Maintenance

API SERVICE LABEL

API CERTIFICATION MARK

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 205: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Engine Oil

The SAE numbers tell you the oil'sviscosity or weight. Select the oil foryour vehicle according to this chart.

An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 ispreferred for improved fuel economyand year-round protection in yourHonda. You may use a 10W-30 oil ifthe temperature in your area nevergoes below 20°F( — 7°C).

Synthetic OilYou may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for conventional motor oil;energy conserving, a serviceclassification of SJ, and the properweight as shown on the chart. Whenusing synthetic oil, you must followthe oil and filter change intervalsgiven in the maintenance schedule.

AdditivesYour Honda does not need any oiladditives. Purchasing additives forthe engine or transmission will notincrease your vehicle's performanceor longevity. It only increases thecost of operating your vehicle.

Changing the Oil and FilterAlways change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1. Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 206: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Engine Oil

2. Open the hood and remove theengine oil fi l l cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

3. Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

4. Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:33 Ibf.ft (44 N.m , 4.5 kgf.m)

CONTINUED

Maintenance

WASHER DRAIN BOLT

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

DRAIN BOLTWASHER OIL FILTER

4-cylinder models

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 207: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Engine Oil

6. Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

(4-cylinder models)4.5 US qt (4.3 , 3.8 Imp qt)(6-cylinder models)4.6 US qt (4.4 ,3.9 Imp qt)

7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

8. Let the engine run for severalminutes and check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

9. Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmful to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Maintenance

OIL FILTER

6-cylinder models

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 208: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Cooling System

Adding Engine Coolant

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.This coolant should always be amixture of 50 percent antifreeze and50 percent water. Never add straightantifreeze or plain water.

Always use Genuine Hondaantifreeze/coolant. If it is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed and

refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK 6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 209: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Cooling System

1. Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

3. Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Maintenance

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

RADIATOR CAP

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 210: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Cooling System

4. The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle'scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Replacing Engine CoolantThe cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useGenuine Honda antifreeze/coolant.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the vehicle.Unless you have the tools andknowledge, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK 6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 211: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Cooling System

1. Turn the heater temperaturecontrol dial to maximum heat.Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

EX-V6 modelTurn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe temperature control dial to90° F (32° C). Turn off the ignitionand remove the key.

2. Remove the radiator cap.

4-cylinder models3. Loosen the drain plug on the

bottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Remove the drainbolt and washer from the engineblock.

Maintenance

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

DRAINBOLT

DRAINPLUG

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 212: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Cooling System

6-cylinder models3. Loosen the drain plug on the

bottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Loosen the drainbolt.

4. Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant, then put thetank back in its holder.

6-cylinder modelsWhen removing the reserve tank,first remove the cruise control cableand the ground cable from theirclips. After installing the tank backin place, put the cables back in theirclips.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

DRAIN PLUG

6-cylinder models DRAIN BOLT

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK CAP

4-cylinder models HOLDER 6-cylinder models

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 213: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Cooling System

5. When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug in thebottom of the radiator.

6. 4-cylinder modelsPut a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt in theengine block. Tighten it securely.

Tightening torque:61 lbf-ft(83N.m,8.5kgf-m)

6-cylinder modelsTighten the drain bolt at the rearof the engine cylinder blocksecurely.

Tightening torque:7bf.ft (10N.m,1.0kgfm)

7. Mix the recommended antifreezewith an equal amount of purifiedor distilled water in a cleancontainer. The cooling systemcapacity is:

With 5-speed manual transmission:1.45 US gal (5.5 ,1.21 Imp gal)With automatic transmission:1.43 US gal (5.4 ,1.19 Imp gal)6 cylinder models1.48 US gal (5.6 ,1.23 Imp gal)

8. Pour coolant into the radiator upto the base of the filler neck.

Maintenance

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK CAP FILLER NECK

6-cylinder models HOLDER 4-cylinder models Fill up to here

FILLER NECK

6-cylinder models Fill up to here

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 214: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Cooling System

9. 4-cylinder modelsLoosen the bleeder bolt on top ofthe engine. Tighten it again whencoolant comes out in a steadystream with no bubbles.

10. Refill the radiator to the base ofthe filler neck. Start the engineand let it run until it warms up (theradiator cooling fan comes on atleast twice).

11. Turn off the engine. Check thelevel in the radiator, add coolant ifneeded. Install the radiator cap,and tighten it fully.

12 . Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Maintenance

RESERVE TANK

4-cylinder models BLEEDER BOLT 4-cylinder models

RESERVE TANK

6-cylinder models

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 215: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Windshield Washers

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the headlight.

Check the reservoir's fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

Canadian ModelsThe low washer level indicator wil llight when the level is low (see page53).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

Do not use engine antifreeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antifreeze can damage your vehicle'spaint, while a vinegar/water solutioncan damage the windshield washerpump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer fluid.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Maintenance

LEVEL GAUGE

4-cylinder models

NOTICE

6-cylinder models

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 216: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission4 cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

3. Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

4. Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

5. If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda Premium FormulaAutomatic Transmission Fluid(ATF). If it is not available, youmay use a DEXRON® IIIautomatic transmission fluid as atemporary replacement. However,continued use can affect shiftquality. Have the transmissiondrained and refilled with HondaATF as soon as it is convenient.

6. Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 217: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission6 cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

3. Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

4. Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

5. If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda Premium FormulaAutomatic Transmission Fluid(ATF). If it is not available, youmay use a DEXRON® IIIautomatic transmission fluid as atemporary replacement. However,continued use can affect shiftquality. Have the transmissiondrained and refilled with HondaATF as soon as it is convenient.

6. Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 218: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Transmission Fluid

5-speed Manual Transmission

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Genuine Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler bolt and tighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an API service SG, SH or SJgrade motor oil with a viscosity ofSAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as atemporary replacement. An SGgrade is preferred, but an SH or SJgrade may be used if SG is notavailable. However, motor oil doesnot contain the proper additives andcontinued use can cause stiffershifting. Replace as soon asconvenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance

Correct level

FILLERBOLT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 219: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

The brake fluid in the brake systemshould be replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3brake fluid. If it is not available, youshould use only DOT 3 or DOT 4fluid, from a sealed container, as atemporary replacement. However,the use of any non-Honda brake fluidcan cause corrosion and decreasethe life of the system. Have thebrake system flushed and refilledwith Honda DOT 3 brake fluid assoon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle'sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake System

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Maintenance

MAX

4-cylinder models MIN

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 220: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering

Clutch System

The fluid should be between theMIN and MAX marks on the side ofthe reservoir. If it is not, add brakefluid to bring it up to that level. Usethe same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Check the level when the engine iscold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

UPPER LEVEL

6-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL

MAX

MIN

Power Steering

MAX

4-cylinder models MIN

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 221: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Power Steering, Air Cleaner Element

Always use Genuine Honda PowerSteering Fluid. If it is not available,you may use another power steeringfluid as an emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Turning the steering wheel to full leftor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Air Cleaner ElementThe air cleaner element should becleaned or replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your Honda dealer to dothis service.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

Maintenance

UPPER LEVEL

6-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 222: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Air Cleaner Element (4 Cylinder Models)

ReplacementThe air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the passenger'sside of the engine compartment.To replace it:

CLAMPS

1. Unsnap the four hold-down clampsand remove the air cleanerhousing cover.

2. Remove the old air cleanerelement.

3. Clean the inside of the air cleanerhousing with a damp rag.

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

4. Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

5. Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, snap the four hold-downclamps back into place.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 223: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Air Cleaner Element (6 Cylinder Models)

ReplacementThe air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver'sside of the engine compartment.To replace it:

1. Loosen the four bolts and removethe air cleaner housing cover.

2. Remove the old air cleanerelement.

3. Clean the inside of the air cleanerhousing with a damp rag.

4. Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

5. Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, tighten the four bolts.

Maintenance

BOLTS

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 224: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Spark Plugs (4 Cylinder Models)

The spark plugs in your vehicleshould be replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Replacement

1. Clean up any dirt and oil aroundthe spark plug caps.

2. Remove the spark plug cap bypulling it straight out.

3. Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

4. Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

SPARK PLUG CAP

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 225: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Spark Plugs (4 Cylinder Models)

5. Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:13 lbf.ft (18 N.m,1.8 kgf.m)

Tighten the spark plugs carefully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause, damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

6. Install the spark plug cap.

7. Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Specifications:

NGK:DENSO:

ZFR5F-11KJ16CR-L11

Spark Plug Gap:0.04 in (1.1 mm)

Maintenance

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 226: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Spark Plugs (6 Cylinder Models)

The spark plugs in your vehicleshould be replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Replacement

1. Clean up any dirt and oil aroundthe spark plug caps.

2. Remove the cover on the frontcylinder bank by pulling on thefront edge.

3. Remove the spark plug cap bypulling it straight out.

4. Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

COVER SPARK PLUG CAP

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 227: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Spark Plugs (6 Cylinder Models)

5. Put the new spark plug into thesocket; then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

6. Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:13 lbf-ft (18N.m, 1.8kgfm)

Tighten the spark plugs carefully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

7. Install the spark plug cap.

8. Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

9. Reinstall the cover on the frontcylinder bank.

Specifications:

NGK:DENSO:

PZFR5F-11PKJ16CR-L11

Spark Plug Gap:0.04 in (1.1 mm)

Maintenance

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 228: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Battery

Check the condition of your vehicle'sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator's colors.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

4-cylinder models

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

6 cylinder models

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 229: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Battery

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative (—) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the vehicle'selectrical system.

Maintenance

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 230: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Battery

On EX and EX-V6 modelsIf your car's battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the audio system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the radio you will see "Code" inthe frequency display. Use thePreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode (see page 150 ).

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourvehicle's electronic controls. Detachthe battery cables before connectingthe battery to a charger.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 231: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Wiper Blades

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace the blade:

1. Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.Raise the driver's side first, thenthe passenger's side.

2. Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold it in while youpush the blade assembly towardthe base of the arm.

Maintenance

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 232: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Wiper Blades

3. Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

4. Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

5. Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

6. Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.Lower the passenger's side first,then the driver's side.

Maintenance

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 233: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Air Conditioning System

Optional for DX modelYour vehicle's air conditioning is asealed system. Any major mainte-nance, such as recharging, should bedone by a qualified mechanic. Youcan do a couple of things to makesure the air conditioning worksefficiently.

Periodically check the engine'sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

The condenser and radiator fins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor soft-bristle brush to clean them.

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page296.)

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicefacility uses a refrigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures therefrigerant for reuse. Releasingrefrigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

Maintenance

AIR CONDITIONINGCONDENSER

NOTICE

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 234: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Air Conditioning Filter, Drive Belts

Air Conditioning FilterThe air conditioning filter removespollen and dust from the outside airthe heating and cooling systembrings into the interior.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theclimate control system becomes lessthan usual. Have the air conditioningfilter replaced by your Honda dealer.

Drive Belts

Check the condition of the drivebelts (two on 4-cylinder models, oneon 6-cylinder models). Examine theedges of each belt for cracks orfraying.Check the tension of each belt bypushing on it with your thumbmidway between the pulleys.The belts should have the following"play" or deflection.

4-cylinder modelsAlternator belt:

(On vehicles without A/C)0.41 — 0.49 in (10.5 — 12.5 mm)(On vehicles with A/C)0.28 — 0.35 in (7.0 — 9.0 mm)

Power steering belt:0.51 — 0.63 in (13.0 — 16.0 mm)

CONTINUED

Maintenance

ALTERNATOR BELT

4-cylinder modelsPOWER STEERINGBELT

POWER STEERING BELT

6-cylinder models

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 235: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Drive Belts, Timing Belt, Tires

6-cylinder modelsPower steering belt:

0.51 — 0.65 in (13.0 —16.5 mm)

If you see signs of wear or looseness,have your dealer adjust or replacethe belts.

Timing BeltThe timing belt and balancer beltshould normally be replaced at theintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Replace these belts at 60,000 miles(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your vehicle in one ormore of these conditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under —20°F, — 29°C).

TiresTo safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated. Thefollowing pages give more detailedinformation on how and when tocheck air pressure, how to inspectyour tires for damage and wear, andwhat to do when your tires need tobe replaced.

Maintenance

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 236: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tires

InflationKeeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life and ridingcomfort. Underinflatecl tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, are moreprone to damage from road hazards,and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive thevehicle before checking the tirepressure, the tires can still beconsidered "cold" if you drive lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km).

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the vehicle has beendriven several miles), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 237: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal DrivingThe following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds.

The compact spare tire pressure is:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm2)

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver's doorjamb.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 238: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tires

InspectionEvery time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Your vehicle's tires have wear indica-tors molded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

MaintenanceIn addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 239: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tires

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your vehicle'soriginal tires were dynamic or "spin"balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

(EX, EX-V6)Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle's aluminum wheels. Useonly Genuine Honda wheel weights forbalancing.

Tire Rotation

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare "directional." This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,

they should be rotated only front-to-back.

Replacing Tires and WheelsThe tires that came with yourvehicle were selected to match theperformance capabilities of thevehicle while providing the bestcombination of handling, ridecomfort, and long life. You shouldreplace them with radial tires of thesame size, load range, speed rating,and maximum cold tire pressurerating (as shown on the tire'ssidewall). Mixing radial and bias-plytires on your vehicle can reduce itsbraking ability, traction, and steeringaccuracy.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 240: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tires

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle's han-dling.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system towork inconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel's specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your vehicle. Re-placement wheels are available atyour Honda dealer.

Wheels and TiresWheel:(DX)14 x 5 1/2 JJ

(LX, EX)1 5 x 6 J J

(LX-V6, EX-V6)15x61/2 JJ

Tire:(DX)

P195/70R1490S

(LX, EX)P195/65R1589H

(LX-V6, EX-V6)P205/65R1592V

See Tire Information on page 299 foradditional information about tire andwheel size designations. See page300 for information about DOT TireQuality Grading.

Maintenance

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner's manual.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 241: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tires

Winter DrivingTires that are marked "M + S" or"All Season" on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Snow TiresIf you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour vehicle's handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your vehicle's

original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Tire ChainsMount snow chains on your vehiclewhen warranted by driving condi-tions or required by local laws. Makesure the chains are the correct sizefor your tires. Install them only onthe front tires.

4-cylinder modelsIf metal chains are used, they mustbe SAE class "S". Cable-type tractiondevices can also be used.

6-cylinder modelsUse only SAE class "S" cable-typetraction devices.

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer's instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed.If you hear the chains contacting thebody or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Make sure the chainsare installed tightly, and that theyare not contacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove the chains assoon as you begin driving oncleared roads.

Chains of the wrong size or that areimproperly installed can damage yourvehicle's brake lines, suspension, body,and wheels. Stop driving if you hearthe chains hitting any part of thevehicle.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 242: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

Check the operation of your vehicle'sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourvehicle's visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

HEADLIGHT TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER LIGHT

PARKING LIGHT

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 243: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

TAILLIGHT HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BACK-UP LIGHT

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page 297 todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

Maintenance

STOP/TAILLIGHT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 244: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

Headlight AimingThe headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. Youshould check their aim if youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer. Each headlightassembly has horizontal and verticaladjustment indicators. These are setto their "0" positions after theheadlights are aimed at the factory.

To check these settings:

1. Make sure the fuel tank is full.Park the vehicle on level ground.

2. The driver or someone whoweighs the same should be sittingin the driver's seat for all checksand adjustments.Load the trunk with the items younormally carry.

If you usually pull a trailer, load it asyou would normally and attach it tothe vehicle. Push down on the frontand rear bumpers several times tomake sure the vehicle is sittingnormally.

HORIZONTAL GAUGE

3. Open the hood.

4. Check the horizontal angle gauge.The line on the adjustment screwindicator should line up with themark on the gauge.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 245: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

5. Check the vertical angle gauge.The bubble should be centeredunderneath the longest scribemark on the gauge.

6. If either indicator is not alignedwith its "0" mark as described, anadjustment can be made using aPhillips-head screwdriver torealign it with the "0" mark. Pleaserefer to the illustrations.

7. If you cannot get an indicator toalign, have your Honda dealerinspect the vehicle for bodydamage or suspension problems.

Maintenance

VERTICAL ANGLE GAUGE HORIZONTAL ADJUSTMENT VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 246: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

Replacing a Headlight BulbYour vehicle has two bulbs on eachside, four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb (hat is burned out.Your vehicle uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

1. Open the hood.If you need to change a bulb onthe passenger's side (on thedriver's side on 6-cylinder models),remove the radiator reserve tank.

2. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

3. Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

4. Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

5. Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

6. Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

7. (Passenger's side on 4-cylindermodels, driver's side on 6-cylindermodels)Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.

Maintenance

NOTICE

BULB

TAB

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 247: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

Replacing Front Turn Signal andSide Marker Light Bulbs

1. If you are changing the bulb onthe driver's side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger's side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender.

3. Pull the inner fender away fromthe fender and bumper.

4. Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

5. Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning counterclockwise until itunlocks.

6. Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

7. Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

8. Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

9. Put the inner fender in place.Install the holding clip. Lock it inplace by pushing on the center.

Maintenance

HOLDING CLIP

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 248: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

Replacing a Parking Light Bulb

1. The parking light bulb is under theheadlight bulb.

Turn the bulb holder one-quarterturn counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lens.

2. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

3. Put the bulb holder back into itshole in the lens, and turn itclockwise until it locks.

4. Turn on the parking lights tomake sure the new bulb works.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 249: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Fenders)

1. Open the trunk.

Remove the fastener on the side ofthe trunk lining by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin. Pullthe lining back.

2. Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight or turnsignal.

3. Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

5. Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

6. Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

7. Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

8. Put the fastener in the hole of theside of the trunk lining and pushon the center until it locks (thecenter is flush with the head).

Maintenance

FASTENER

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 250: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs (in TrunkLid)

1. Open the trunk.

2. Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: taillight or back-uplight.

3. Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4. Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pulling it straight outof its socket.

5. Install the new bulb in the socket.

6. Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly.

7. Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 251: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

1. Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

2. Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

3. Install the new bulb and reinstallthe socket. Make sure the newbulb is working.

Replacing a Rear License Bulb

1. Remove the license light assemblyby carefully prying on the rightedge of the lens with a flat-tipscrewdriver and pulling theassembly out.

2. Remove the lens from the bulbholder by pulling the lens whilesqueezing the tabs on both sidesof the holder.

Maintenance

BULB

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 252: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

3. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

4. Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

5. Put the lens back on the bulbholder and push it until it latches.

6. Slide the left side of the lightassembly into the hole. Push onthe right side to latch theassembly into place.

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLightsThe ceiling light, door light andvanity mirror light come apart thesame way. They do not all use thesame bulb.

1. Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Door light:Not available on DX modelpry on the top middle of the lens.

Ceiling light:pry on the front edge of the lensnear both sides.

Spotlight:Not available on DX modelpry on the front edge in front ofboth spotlights.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

3. Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

CEILING LIGHT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 253: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Lights

On all models except DX model On all models except DX model On all models except DX model

Maintenance

SPOTLIGHT DOOR LIGHT SUN VISOR

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 254: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

1. Open the trunk. Pull down thetrunk light cover.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

3. Push the new bulb into the metaltabs.

4. Push the cover back in place.

Lights

Maintenance

TRUNK LIGHT

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 255: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Storing Your Vehicle

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page 208).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse (5-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a"breathable" vehicle cover, onemade from a porous material suchas cotton. Nonporous materials,such as plastic sheeting, trapmoisture, which can damage thepaint.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your vehicle for 12months or longer, have your Hondadealer perform the inspections calledfor in the 24 months/30,000 miles(48,000 km) maintenance schedule(Normal Conditions) as soon as youtake it out of storage (see page 196 ).The replacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time or mileage.

Maintenance

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 256: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Appearance Care

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it "new"looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your vehicle andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

Exterior Care.................................. 260Washing..................................... 260Waxing...................................... 261Aluminum Wheels..................... 261Paint Touch-up........................... 261

Interior Care................................... 262Carpeting.................................... 262Fabric.......................................... 262Vinyl........................................... 262Leather....................................... 262Seat Belts.................................... 263Windows..................................... 263Air Fresheners........................... 263

Corrosion Protection..................... 264Body Repairs.................................. 265

Appearance Care

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 257: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Exterior Care

WashingFrequent washing helps preserveyour vehicle's beauty. Dirt and gritcan scratch the paint, while tree sapand bird droppings can permanentlyruin the finish.

Wash your vehicle in a shady area,not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle isparked in the sun, move it into theshade and let the exterior cool downbefore you start.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner'sManual.

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your vehicle.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly withcool water to remove loose dirt.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for vehiclewashing.

Wash the vehicle using the waterand detergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe vehicle does not need waxing.

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

As you dry the vehicle, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page 261).

Appearance Care

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 258: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Exterior Care

WaxingAlways wash and dry the wholevehicle before waxing it. You shouldwax your vehicle, including the metaltrim, whenever water sits on thesurface in large patches. It shouldform into beads or droplets afterwaxing.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes — A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

Polishes — Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that remove

the top layer of the finish. Youshould use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the vehicle doesnot need waxing.

Aluminum WheelsOn EX and EX-V6 modelsClean your Honda's aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Paint Touch-upYour dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle's color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver's doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your vehicle frequently forchips or scratches in the paint.Repair them right away to preventcorrosion of the metal underneath.Use the touch-up paint only on smallchips and scratches. More extensivepaint damage should be repaired bya professional.

Appearance Care

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 259: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Interior Care

CarpetingVacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

FabricVacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

VinylRemove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

LeatherOn EX and EX-V6 modelsVacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

Appearance Care

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 260: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Interior Care

Seat Belts

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

WindowsClean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

The rear window defagger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning (he rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Air FreshenersIf you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of yourvehicle, it is best to use a solid type.Some liquid air fresheners containchemicals that may cause parts ofthe interior trim and fabric to crackor discolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Appearance Care

LOOP

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 261: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Corrosion Protection

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your vehicle:

1. Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thevehicle stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

2. Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the vehicle.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your vehicle fromcorroding by performing somesimple periodic maintenance:

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your vehicle. Thisis especially important in areasthat use road salt in winter. It isalso a good idea in humid climatesand areas subject to salt air.Vehicles equipped with ABS havea sensor and wiring at each wheel.Be careful not to damage them.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourvehicle inspected and repairedperiodically.

Appearance Care

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 262: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Body Repairs

Body repairs can affect your vehicle'sresistance to corrosion. If yourvehicle needs repairs after a collision,pay close attention to the parts usedin the repair and the quality of thework.

Make sure the repair facility usesGenuine Honda replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Honda body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant Genuine Honda parts used inthe repair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs arebegun.

Take your vehicle to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. He can makesure that quality materials were used,and that corrosion-preventivecoatings were applied to all repairedand replaced parts.

Appearance Care

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 263: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

Compact Spare Tire....................... 268Changing a Flat Tire.................... 269If Your Engine Won't Start........... 275

Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor OperatesVery Slowly............................. 275

The Starter OperatesNormally................................. 276

Jump Starting................................. 276If Your Engine Overheats............. 279Low Oil Pressure Indicator.......... 281Charging System Indicator........... 282Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 283Brake System Indicator................ 284Closing the Moonroof................... 285Fuses............................................... 286

Checking and Replacing........... 287Emergency Towing...................... 291

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 264: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Compact Spare Tire

Your vehicle has a compact sparetire that takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put back onyour vehicle as soon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour vehicle. Do not use yourspare tire on another vehicleunless it is the same make andmodel.

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

INDICATORLOCATIONMARK

TREAD WEARINDICATORBAR

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 265: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Changing a Flat Tire

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, levelground away from traffic. Turn onthe hazard warning lights and turnthe ignition switch to LOCK (0).

2. Put the transmission in Park(automatic) or Reverse (manual).Apply the parking brake. Have allof the passengers get out of thevehicle while you change the tire.

3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

4. Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

5. The tools are in the tool box onthe right side of the trunk. Takethe tools out of the tool box.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

TRUNK FLOOR TOOL BOX

SPARE TIRE JACK

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 266: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Changing a Flat Tire

6. The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

7. Turn the jack's end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

8. Loosen the four wheel nuts (4-cylinder) or five wheel nuts (V-6)1/2 turn with the wheel wrench.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

JACK

WHEEL NUTS

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 267: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Changing a Flat Tire

9. Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

10. Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

DX and LX models:Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriveror other tool. The wheel covercannot be removed without firstremoving the wheel nuts.

11. Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.Placing the wheel face down couldmar its finish.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

JACKING POINT

EXTENSION

WHEEL WRENCH

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 268: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Changing a Flat Tire

12. Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

13. Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

14. Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

BRAKE HUB

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 269: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Changing a Flat Tire

15. Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:80 lbf.ft (108 N.m,11 kgf.m)

16. EX, EX-V6 modelsRemove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

4-cylinder model 6-cylinder model

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 270: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won't Start

17. Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

18. Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

19. Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

20. Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack's end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

21. Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

If Your Engine Won't StartDiagnosing why your engine won'tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine's startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

WING BOLT SPACERCONE

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack and toolssecurely before driving.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 271: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

If Your Engine Won't Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very SlowlyWhen you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Your vehicle has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page 53).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don't light at all,the battery is discharged. SeeJump Starting on page 276.

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (SeeEmergency Towing on page 291.)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page 231). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page276).

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 272: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

If Your Engine Won't Start, Jump Starting

The Starter Operates NormallyIn this case, the starter motor'sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to Starting theEngine on page 169 .Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page 286).

If you find nothing wrong, you wil lneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See EmergencyTowing on page 291.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle's battery has rundown, you may be able to start theengine by using a booster battery.Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

To jump start your vehicle, followthese directions closely:

1. Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page 231). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can freeze.Attempting to jump start with a frozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

2. Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: climate control, stereosystem, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 273: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Jump Starting

3. Connect one jumper cable to thepositive (+ ) terminal on thebooster battery. Connect the otherend to the positive (+ ) terminalon your Honda's battery.

4. Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( — ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

5. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

CONTINUED

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 274: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Jump Starting

6. Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthe jumper cable connections tomake sure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

7. Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then the booster battery.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

6-cylinder models 4-cylinder modelsBOOSTERBATTERY 6-cylinder models

BOOSTERBATTERY

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 275: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

If Your Engine Overheats

The pointer of your vehicle'stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.It may go higher if you are driving upa long steep hill on a very hot clay. Ifit climbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Your vehicle can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1. Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and coolingsystem and all other accessories.Turn on the hazard warningindicators.

2. If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

3. If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is clue to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 276: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

If Your Engine Overheats

4. If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

5. Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

6. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see EmergencyTowing on page 291).

7. If you don't find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page159). If the level is below the

MIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

8. If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

9. Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

10. Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90° F/32° C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

11. Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See EmergencyTowing on page 291.)

12. If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 277: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn offthe engine as soon as you can safely getthe vehicle stopped.

1. Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood and check the oillevel (see page 157). Although oillevel and oil pressure are notdirectly connected, an engine thatis very low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

3. If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page 206).

4. Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See EmergencyTowing on page 291.)

Taking Care of the Unexpected

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 278: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Charging System Indicator

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C, reardefogger, cruise control, etc. Try notto use other electrically-operatedcontrols such as the power windows.Keep the engine running and takeextra care not to stall it. Starting theengine will discharge the batteryrapidly.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 279: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates one of theengine's emissions control systemsmay have a problem. Even thoughyou may feel no difference in yourvehicle's performance, it can reduceyour fuel economy and cause yourvehicle to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks. Replacethe fuel fill cap if it is missing.Tightening the cap will not make theindicator turn off immediately; ittakes three driving trips.

If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

If you keep driving with the malfunc-tion indicator lamp on, you can damageyour vehicle's emission controls andengine. Those repairs may not becovered by your vehicle's warranties.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 280: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Brake System Indicator

The Brake System indicator lightcomes on when you turn theignition ON (II). If the parkingbrake is not set, it goes off afteryou start the engine. If theparking brake is set, it goes offwhen you fully release theparking brake with the enginerunning.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the vehicle'sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page 222 ). If thefluid level is low, take the vehicle toyour dealer and have the brakesystem inspected for leaks or wornbrake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system's dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before thevehicle begins to slow down, and youwill have to press harder on thepedal. The distance needed to stopwill be much longer.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 281: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Closing the Moonroof

If the electric motor will act closethe moonroof, do the following:

1. Check the fuse for the mooroofmotor (see page 286). IF the fuseIs blown, replace If with one of thesame or lower rating.

2. Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

3. Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

4. Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

5. Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed,

6. Remove the wrench. Replace theround plug.

SOCKETROUND PLUG

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 282: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Fuses

All the electrical circuits in yourvehicle have fuses to protect themfrom a short circuit or overload.These fuses are located in three fuseboxes.

The interior fuse boxes are on eachside of the dashboard. To open aninterior fuse box, open the vehicledoor. Pull the cover open, then takeit out of its hinges by pulling ittoward you.

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the back of the engine compart-ment on the passenger's side. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD TAB

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 283: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Fuses

Checking and Replacing FusesIf something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages288 and 289, or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component'soperation.

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

2. Remove the cover from the fusebox.

3. Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

4. Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 284: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Fuses

5. Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment fuse with the proper rating for thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

6. If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

BLOWN

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 285: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Fuses

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 286: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Fuses

INTERIOR FUSE BOXESDRIVER'S SIDE PASSENGER'S SIDE

* : On Canadian models

* : On Canadian models

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 287: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Emergency Towing

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing serviceor, if you belong to one, anorganization that provides roadsideassistance. Never tow your vehiclebehind another vehicle with just arope or chain. It is very dangerous.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

Flat-bed Equipment — The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck. This is the best way totransport your Honda.

Wheel-Lift Equipment — The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground. This isan acceptable way to tow yourHonda.

Sling-type Equipment — The towtruck uses metal cables with hooks

on the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the vehicleoff the ground. Your vehicle'ssuspension and body can beseriously damaged. This method oftowing is unacceptable.

If your Honda cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If, due todamage, your vehicle must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following.

5-speed Manual TransmissionRelease the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

Automatic TransmissionRelease the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D4, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Followthe above procedure exactly. If youcannot shift the transmission orstart the engine (automatictransmission), your vehicle must betransported with the front wheelsoff the ground.

With the front wheels on theground, it is best to tow the vehicleno farther than 50 miles (80 km),and keep the speed below 35 mph(55 km/h).

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed above, and leave theignition switch in Accessory (I) sothe steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any items

Taking Care of the Unexpected

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 288: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Emergency Towing

plugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle bythe bumpers will cause seriousdamage. The bumpers are notdesigned to support the vehicle'sweight.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

The steering system can bedamaged if the steering wheel islocked. Leave the ignition switch inAccessory (I), and make sure thesteering wheel turns freely beforeyou begin towing.

NOTICE

NOTICE

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 289: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Technical Information

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. The expla-nations of several electronic andmechanical systems on your Hondaare for the more technically-orientedowner.

Identification Numbers................. 294Specifications................................. 296Tire Information............................ 299

Tire Size Designation................ 299Wheel Size Designation............ 299Tire Speed Ratings.................... 299DOT Tire Quality Grading....... 300

Treadwear.............................. 300Traction.................................. 300Temperature.......................... 301

Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 302Driving In Foreign Countries....... 303Emissions Controls........................ 304

The Clean Air Act...................... 304Crankcase Emissions Control

System.................................... 304Evaporative Emissions Control

System.................................... 304Exhaust Emissions Controls.... 305

PGM-FI System..................... 305Ignition Timing Control

System................................. 305Exhaust Gas Recirculation

(EGR) System.................... 305Three Way Catalytic-

Converter............................ 305Replacement Parts..................... 305

Three Way Catalytic Converter... 306

Technical Information

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 290: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Identification Numbers

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver's side. Itis also on the Certification label at-tached to the driver's doorjamb, andis stamped on the engine com-partment bulkhead. The VIN is alsoprovided in bar code on theCertification label.

Technical Information

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 291: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Identification Numbers

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Technical Information

4-Cylinder Models 6-Cylinder Models

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER

MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER ENGINE NUMBER AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION NUMBER

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 292: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Specifications

* 1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 ,0.13 Imp gal)

* 2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

* 3 : 6-cylinder models

Technical Information

* : 6-cylinder models

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 293: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Specifications

Technical Information

* 1 : DX* 2 : LX, EX* 3 : 6-cylinder models

page 290

page 289

pages 228

CONTINUED

230

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 294: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Specifications

*1 : DX

*2 : LX, EX

* 3 : 4-cylinder models

* 4 : 6-cylinder models

Technical Information

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 295: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tire Information

Tire Size DesignationA tire's sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your vehicle. Thefollowing explains what the lettersand numbers in the tire sizedesignation mean.

(Example tire size designation)P195/65R15 89H

P — Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix "P" areintended for use on passengervehicles; however, not all tires havethis marking).

195 — Tire width in millimeters.

65 — Aspect ratio. The tire's sectionheight as a percentage of its width.

R — Tire construction code (Radial).

15 — Rim diameter in inches.

89 — Load Index, a numerical codeassociated with the maximum loadthe tire can carry.

H — Speed Symbol. See the speedrating chart in this section foradditional information.

Wheel Size DesignationWheels are also marked withimportant information that you needif you ever have to replace one. Thefollowing explains what the lettersand numbers in the wheel sizedesignation mean.

(Example wheel size designation)15x6JJ

15 — Rim diameter in inches.

6 — Rim width in inches.

JJ — Rim contour designation.

Tire Speed RatingsThe chart below shows many of thedifferent speed ratings currentlybeing used for passenger vehicletires. The speed symbol is part of thetire size designation on the sidewallof the tire. This symbol correspondsto that tire's designed maximum safeoperating speed.

Technical Information

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 296: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tire Information

DOT Tire Quality Grading(U.S. Cars)The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1-1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest tolowest, are A, B, and C, and theyrepresent the tire's ability to stop onwet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade as-signed to this tire is based on brak-ing (straight ahead) traction testsand does not include cornering(turning) traction.

Technical Information

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 297: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tire Information

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Technical Information

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 298: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Tire Information

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Technical Information

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 299: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Oxygenated Fuels

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel's contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the EPA-approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

ETHANOL (ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name "Gasohol."

MTBE (Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

METHANOL (methyl or woodalcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 5 percent methanol by volume aslong as it also contains cosolventsand corrosion inhibitors to protectthe fuel system. Gasoline containingmore than 5 percent methanol byvolume may cause starting and/orperformance problems. It may alsodamage metal, rubber and plasticparts of your fuel system.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

Technical Information

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 300: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Driving In Foreign Countries

Technical Information

If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your vehicle backinto compliance will require the re-placement of several components,such as the oxygen sensors and thethree way catalytic converter. Thesereplacements are not covered underwarranty.

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 301: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Emissions Controls

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle's engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical "smog."Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The Clean Air ActThe United States Clean Air Act*sets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page164.

* In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystemYour vehicle has a PositiveCrankcase Ventilation System. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine's crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The Positive Crank-case Ventilation valve routes themfrom the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystemAs gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

Technical Information

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 302: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions ControlsThe exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine's combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

PGM-FI SystemThe PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-

ing conditions.

Ignition Timing Control SystemThis system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)SystemThe Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterThe three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine's exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen(N2), and water vapor.

Replacement PartsThe emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newGenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

Technical Information

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 303: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine's per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle's three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Technical Information

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 304: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer RelationsInformation................................. 308

U.S. Zone Office Map.................... 309Canada Zone Office Map.............. 310Warranty Coverages..................... 311Reporting Safety Defects

(U.S. Cars).................................. 312Authorized Manuals...................... 313

Warranty and Customer Relations

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 305: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Customer Relations Information

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership's management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership'smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Zone Office.Refer to the U.S. and Canadian ZoneOffice maps on the following pages.

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page 294)Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

Warranty and Customer Relations

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 306: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. OwnersYour new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty —covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty — these twowarranties cover your vehicle's emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty — this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty — a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty— all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Accessory Limited Warranty —Genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty — covers all GenuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty — provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty — providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the1998 Honda Warranties booklet thatcame with your vehicle for preciseinformation on warranty coverages.Your Honda's original tires arecovered by their manufacturer. Tirewarranty information is in a separatebooklet.

Canadian OwnersPlease refer to the 1998 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 307: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Cars)

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼

Page 308: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Index

Accessories and Modifications.... 161Accessories................................. 161Additional Safety Information.. 162Modifications............................. 162

ACCESSORY (Ignition KeyPosition)........................................ 70

Accessory Power Socket.............. 100Adding

Automatic TransmissionFluid............................... 219, 220

Brake Fluid................................. 222Clutch Fluid................................ 223Engine Coolant........................... 211Engine Oil................................... 206Manual Transmission Fluid ..... 221Power Steering Fluid................. 223Windshield Washer Fluid......... 218

Additional Information AboutYour Seat Belts........................ 38

Lap/Shoulder Belts..................... 38Seat Belt Maintenance................ 39Seat Belt System Components... 38

Additional Information AboutYour SRS.................................. 40

Additional Safety Precautions.... 43How Your Airbags Work............ 40How Your SRS Indicator

Works........................................ 42SRS Components......................... 40

Additives, Engine Oil..................... 208Adjustments

Mirrors.......................................... 93Head Restraints........................... 86Seats.............................................. 82Steering Wheel............................ 63

Airbag (SRS)...................................... 7Air Cleaner Element...................... 224Air Conditioning............................. 104

Maintenance............................... 236Usage.......................................... 104

Air Conditioning Filter.................. 237Air Pressure, Tires........................ 239Alcohol in Gasoline........................ 302Antifreeze....................................... 211Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Description................................. 180Indicator Light.....................51, 181Operation.................................... 180

Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 69Appearance Care........................... 259Audio System.........................119, 131Automatic Speed Control................ 64Automatic Transmission............... 172

Capacity, Fluid.......................... 296Checking Fluid Level........ 219, 220Shifting....................................... 172Shift Lever Position Indicator.. 173Shift Lever Positions................. 173Shift Lock Release..................... 176

BatteryCharging System Light....... 50, 282Jump Starting............................. 276Maintenance............................... 231Specifications............................. 297

Before Driving............................... 153Belts, Seat......................................... 6Beverage Holder.............................. 98Body Repair.................................... 265

CONTINUED

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 309: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Index

BrakesAnti-lock System (ABS)............ 180Break-in, New Linings .............. 154Fluid............................................ 222Light, Burned-out...................... 249Parking.......................................... 95System Indicator.......................... 50Wear Indicators......................... 179

Brakes, ABSDescription................................. 180Operation.................................... 180System Indicator..................51, 181

Braking System.............................. 179Break-in, New Car......................... 154Brightness Control, Instruments... 59Brights, Headlights......................... 58Bulb Replacement

Back-up Lights........................... 253Brake Lights............................... 252Ceiling Light............................... 255Courtesy Light........................... 256Front Parking Lights................. 251Front Side Marker Lights......... 250Headlights.................................. 249High-mount Brake Light.......... 254License Plate Lights.................. 254

Specifications............................. 297Spotlight...................................... 256Trunk Light................................ 257Turn Signal Lights..................... 250

Bulbs, Halogen............................... 249

Cables, Jump Starting With.......... 277Capacities Chart............................. 296Carbon Monoxide Hazard.............. 44Carrying, Cargo............................. 163Cassette Player

Care............................................. 148Operation............................124, 145

CAUTION, Explanation of............... iiCD Changer...........................127, 141CD Player........................................ 139Certification Label......................... 294Chains............................................. 244Change Oil

How to......................................... 208When to....................................... 196

Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 269Changing Engine Coolant............. 211Charging System Indicator.... 50, 282

CheckingAutomatic Transmission

Fluid........................................ 219Battery Condition...................... 231Brake Fluid................................. 222Clutch Fluid................................ 223Drive Belts.................................. 237Engine Coolant........................... 159Engine Oil................................... 157Fuses........................................... 287Manual Transmission Fluid ..... 221Power Steering Fluid................. 223

Checklist, Before Driving............. 168Child Safety.................................. 17Cleaner, Air.................................... 224Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels..................... 261Carpeting.................................... 262Exterior....................................... 260Fabric.......................................... 262Interior........................................ 262Seat Belts.................................... 263Vinyl............................................ 262Window..................................... 263

Climate Control.............................. 111Clock, Setting the ............................ 96

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 310: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Index

Clutch Fluid.................................... 223CO in the Exhaust......................... 304Coin Box........................................... 97Cold Weather, Starting in............. 169Compact Spare............................... 268Console Compartment.................... 97Consumer Information*................ 308Controls, Instruments and.............. 47Coolant

Adding......................................... 221Checking..................................... 159Proper Solution.......................... 211Temperature Gauge.................... 55

Corrosion Protection..................... 264Crankcase Emissions Control

System......................................... 304Cruise Control Operation............... 64Customer Relations Office........... 308

DANGER, Explanation of................. iiDashboard........................................ 48Daytime Running Lights................. 59Dead Battery, What to Do............ 276Defects, Reporting Safety............. 312

DEXRON® III AutomaticTransmission Fluid.................... 219

Dimensions..................................... 296Dimming the Headlights................ 58Dipstick

Automatic Transmission . 219, 220Engine Oil................................... 157

Directional Signals........................... 60Disabled, Towing Your Car If...... 291Disc Brake Wear Indicators......... 179Disposal of Used Oil...................... 210Doors

Locking and Unlocking............... 70Power Door Locks....................... 70

DOT Tire Quality Grading........... 300Downshifting, 5-speed Manual

Transmission.............................. 170Drive Belts...................................... 237Driver and Passenger Safety............ 3Driving............................................ 167

Economy..................................... 160In Bad Weather.......................... 182In Foreign Countries................. 303

Economy, Fuel............................... 160Emergencies on the Road............. 267

Battery, Jump Starting.............. 276Brake System Indicator............ 284Changing a Flat Tire................. 269Charging System Indicator...... 282Checking the Fuses................... 287Low Oil Pressure Indicator...... 281Malfunction Indicator Lamp.... 283Manually Closing Moonroof.... 285Overheated Engine................... 279

Emergency Brake............................ 95Emergency Flashers....................... 62Emergency Towing...................... 291Emissions Controls........................ 304Engine

Belts............................................. 237Coolant Temperature Gauge... 55Malfunction Indicator

Lamp................................. 51, 283Oil Pressure Indicator......... 50, 281Oil, What Kind to Use............... 206Overheating................................ 279Specifications............................. 297

CONTINUED

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 311: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Index

Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 302Evaporative Emissions Controls.. 304Exhaust Fumes................................ 44Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

Belts by....................................... 15Exterior, Cleaning the................... 260

Fabric, Cleaning............................. 262Fan, Interior.................................... 104Features, Comfort and

Convenience............................... 103Filling the Fuel Tank..................... 154Filter

Air Conditioning........................ 237Oil............................................... 208

First Gear, Shifting........................ 1755-speed Manual Transmission

Checking Fluid Level................ 2215-speed Manual Transmission

Shifting the................................. 170Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 62Flat Tire, Changing a.................... 269Fluids

Automatic Transmission.. 219, 220

Brake......................................... 222Clutch.......................................... 223Manual Transmission............... 221Power Steering........................... 223Windshield Washer................... 218

FM Stereo RadioReception.................................... 137

Folding Rear Seat............................ 87Foreign Countries, Driving in...... 303Four-way Flashers........................... 62Front End, Towing by

Emergency Wrecker................. 291Fuel.................................................. 154

Fill Door and Cap....................... 154Gauge............................................ 55Octane Requirement................. 154Oxygenated................................ 302Tank, Filling the......................... 154

Fuses, Checking the...................... 287

Gas Mileage, Improving................ 160Gasohol........................................... 302Gasoline.......................................... 154

Gauge............................................ 55

Octane Requirement................. 154Tank, Filling the......................... 154

Gas Station Procedures................. 154Gauges

Engine Coolant Temperature .... 55Fuel................................................ 55

Gearshift Lever PositionsAutomatic Transmission........... 1725-speed Manual

Transmission.......................... 170Glass Cleaning............................... 263Glove Box......................................... 77

Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 245Hazard Warning Flashers............... 62Headlights......................................... 58

Aiming......................................... 247Automatic Lighting Off............... 59Daytime Running Lights............. 59High Beam Indicator................... 52High Beams, Turning on............ 58Low Beams, Turning on............. 58Reminder Chime.......................... 58Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 245

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 312: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Index

HeadlightsTurning on.................................... 58

Head Restraints............................... 86Heating and Cooling...................... 104High Altitude, Starting at.............. 170High-Low Beam Switch .................. 58Homelink Universal Transmitter... 78Hood, Opening the........................ 156Hot Coolant, Warning about........ 212Hydraulic Clutch............................ 223Hydroplaning.................................. 183

Identification Number, Vehicle.... 294If Your Car Has to be Towed....... 291Ignition

Keys............................................... 67Switch............................................ 69Timing Control System............. 305

Immobilizer System......................... 68Important Safety Precautions.......... 4Indicator Lights, Instrument

Panel.............................................. 50Infant Restraint................................ 25Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 239

Inside Mirror.................................... 93Inspection, Tire.............................. 241Instrument Panel............................. 49Instrument Panel Brightness......... 59Interior Cleaning............................ 262Interior Lights................................ 101Introduction......................................... i

Jacking up the Car......................... 271Jack, Tire........................................ 270Jump Starting................................. 276

Keys................................................. 51

Label, Certification........................ 294Lane Change, Signaling.................. 60Lap/Shoulder Belts......................... 38Leaking of Exhaust into Car.......... 44Lights

Bulb Replacement..................... 249

Indicator........................................ 49Parking.......................................... 58Turn Signal................................... 60

LOCK (Ignition Key Position)....... 69Locks

Anti-theft Steering Column........ 69Fuel Fill Door............................. 154Glove Box..................................... 77Power Door.................................. 70Trunk............................................ 76

Low Coolant Level........................... 55Lower Gear, Downshifting to a.... 170Low Oil Pressure Indicator.... 50, 281Lubricant Specifications Chart.... 296Luggage.......................................... 163

Maintenance................................... 191Owner Maintenance Checks.... 203Record.................................. 201-202Required Indicator....................... 56Safety.......................................... 192Schedule.............................. 196-200

CONTINUED

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 313: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Index

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . .51, 283Manual Transmission.................... 170Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 221Maximum Allowable

Speeds.................................172, 176Meters, Gauges................................ 54Methanol in Gasoline.................... 302Mirrors, Adjusting........................... 94Modifications............................... 162Moonroof.......................................... 92

Closing Manually....................... 285Operation...................................... 92

Neutral Gear Position.................... 174New Vehicle Break-in................... 154Normal Shift Speeds...................... 171NOTICE, Explanation of................. iiNumbers, Identification................ 294

Octane Requirement, Gasoline.... 154Odometer.......................................... 54Odometer, Trip................................ 55

OilChange, How to ......................... 208Change, When to....................... 196Checking Engine....................... 157Pressure Indicator............... 50, 281Selecting Proper Viscosity

Chart....................................... 208ON (Ignition Key Position)............ 70Opening the Hood......................... 156Operation in Foreign Countries... 303Outside Mirrors............................... 93Overheating, Engine..................... 279Owner Maintenance Checks........ 203

Panel Brightness Control............... 59Park Gear Position......................... 174Parking............................................ 178Parking Brake.................................. 95Parking Lights.................................. 58Parking Over Things that Burn... 306PGM-FI System.............................. 305Polishing and Waxing................... 261Power

Door Locks................................... 70

Mirrors.......................................... 94Steering....................................... 223Windows....................................... 91

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist.............. 9Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts.......... 15Protecting Adults............................. 10

Additional Safety Precautions.... 16Advice for Pregnant Women...... 15

Protecting Children......................... 17Protecting Infants........................ 25Protecting Larger Children........ 32Protecting Small Children.......... 29Using Child Seats with

Tethers...................................... 35

Radiator Overheating.................... 279Radio/Cassette Sound System.... 119Rear End Towing........................... 291Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement... 252Rear Seat Armrest........................... 89Rear Seat, Folding........................... 87Rear View Mirror............................. 93Rear Window Defogger.................. 62Reclining the Seat Backs.......... 82, 85

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 314: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Index

Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 171Reminder Lights.............................. 49Remote Transmitter........................ 72Remote Audio Controls............... 149Replacement Information

Air Cleaner Element.................. 224Coolant........................................ 213Engine Oil and Filter................. 208Fuses........................................... 287Light Bulbs................................. 249Schedule..................................... 196Spark Plugs ........................ 227, 229Tires.......................................... 242Wiper Blades.............................. 234

Replacing Seat Belts After aCrash........................................... 39

Reserve Tank, Coolant.................. 159Restraint, Child................................ 17Reverse Gear Position................... 174Rotation, Tire................................. 242

Safety Belts......................................... 6Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 312Safety Checklist, Pre-Drive............. 9

Safely Features.................................. 5Airbags............................................ 7Door Locks..................................... 8Head Restraints............................. 8Seat Belts........................................ 6Seat & Seat-Backs.......................... 8

Safety Labels, Location of.............. 45Safety Messages................................ iiSeat Belt, Additional Information.. 38

Lap/Shoulder Belt....................... 38Seat Belt Maintenance................ 39Seat Belt System Components... 38

Seat Belts........................................ 6Cleaning...................................... 263Maintenance................................. 39Reminder Light and

Beeper................................. 38, 50System Components.................... 38Tether Attachment Points.......... 35Use During Pregnancy................ 15

Seats, Adjusting the......................... 82Serial Number................................ 294Service Intervals............................ 196Service Manual* ............................ 313Service Station Procedures .......... 154Setting the Clock............................. 96

ShiftingThe Automatic

Transmission.......................... 172The 5-speed Manual

Transmission.......................... 170Shift Lever Position Indicator...... 173Side Marker Lights, Bulb

Replacement in.......................... 250Signaling Turns................................ 60Snow Tires...................................... 244Solvent-type Cleaners.................... 260Sound System................................. 119Spare Tire

Inflating....................................... 268Specifications............................. 298

Spark Plugs, Replacing......... 227, 229Specifications Charts.................... 296Speed Control................................... 64Speedometer.................................... 54

CONTINUED

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 315: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Index

SRS, Additional Information........... 40Additional Safety Precautions.... 43How Your Airbags Work............ 40How Your SRS Indicator

Works....................................... 42SRS Components......................... 40SRS Service................................... 42

SRS Indicator.............................. 42, 51START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 70Starting the Engine........................ 169

In Cold Weather at HighAltitude................................... 170

With a Dead Battery ................. 276Steam Coming from Engine......... 279Steering Wheel

Adjustment................................... 63Anti-theft Column Lock.............. 69

Steering Wheel ControlsAudio System............................ 149Cruise Control............................. 64

Stereo Sound System.................... 119Storing Your Vehicle.................... 258Sun Visor........................................... 99Sunglasses Holder......................... 100Supplemental Restraint System

Servicing....................................... 42

SRS Indicator.......................... 42, 51System Components.................... 40

Tachometer...................................... 54Taillights, Changing Bulbs in....... 252Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 267Tape Player ............................124, 145Technical Descriptions

Driving in Foreign Countries... 303Emissions Control Systems...... 304Oxygenated Fuels...................... 302Three Way Catalytic

Converter................................ 306Tire Information........................ 299

Temperature Gauge........................ 55Tether Attachment Points.............. 35Three Way Catalytic Converter... 306Time, Setting the............................. 96Timing Belt..................................... 238Tire Chains..................................... 244Tire, How to Change a Flat.......... 269Tires................................................ 238

Air Pressure............................... 239Checking Wear.......................... 241

Compact Spare........................... 268DOT Tire Quality Grading....... 300Inflation..................................... 239Inspection................................... 241Replacing.................................... 242Rotating....................................... 242Snow.......................................... 244Specifications............................. 298

Tools,Tire Changing.................... 269Towing

A Trailer...................................... 184Emergency Wrecker................. 291

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

Automatic....................... 219, 220Checking Fluid Level,

Manual.................................... 221Fluid Selection................... 219, 220Identification Number............... 294Shifting the Automatic.............. 172Shifting the Manual................... 170

Treadwear...................................... 300Trip Meter........................................ 55Trunk................................................. 76

Opening the................................. 76Open Monitor Light.................... 51

Turn Signals..................................... 60

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 316: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Index

Underside, Cleaning...................... 264Unexpected, Taking Care

of the........................................... 267Uniform Tire Quality Grading..... 300Unleaded Gasoline......................... 154Upholstery Cleaning...................... 262Used Oil, How to Dispose of........ 210

Vanity Mirror................................... 99Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 163Vehicle Dimensions....................... 296Vehicle Identification Number..... 294Vehicle Storage.............................. 258VIN................................................ 294Vinyl Cleaning................................ 262Viscosity, Oil................................... 208

Warning BeepersKey in Ignition.............................. 70Seat Belts...................................... 50

WARNING, Explanation of.............. iiWarning Labels, Location of.......... 45Warranty Coverages*................... 311Washer, Windshield

Checking the Fluid Level......... 218Operation...................................... 62

Washing........................................ 260Waxing and Polishing................... 261Wheels

Adjusting the Steering................ 63Alignment and Balance............. 241Compact Spare........................... 268Wrench..................................... 271

WindowsCleaning...................................... 263Operating the Power................... 91Rear, Defogger............................ 62

WindshieldCleaning........................................ 60

Wipers, WindshieldChanging Blades........................ 234Operation...................................... 60

Worn Tires..................................... 241Wrecker, Emergency Towing...... 291

*: U.S. and Canada only

Main Menu ▲ ▼

Page 317: 1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's …...1998 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

Fuel Tank Capacity:17.12 US gal (64.8 l, 14.26 Imp gal)

Recommended Engine Oil:API Service SJ "EnergyConserving" oil, SAE 5W-30viscosity (see page 207).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4-cylinder models4.5 US qt (4.3 l, 3.8 Imp qt)

6-cylinder models4.6 US qt (4.4 l, 3.9 Imp qt)

Automatic Transmission Fluid:Honda Premium FormulaAutomatic Transmission Fluidpreferred, or a DEXRON® III ATFas temporary replacement (seepages 219 and 220).

5-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an API serviceSG, SH or SJ, 10W-30 or 10W-40motor oil as a temporaryreplacement (see page 221).

Capacity:2.0 US qt (1.9 l,1.7 Imp qt)

Power Steering Fluid:Genuine Honda Power SteeringFluid preferred, or another brandof power steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page 224).

Brake Fluid:Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluidpreferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page 222).

Tire Pressure (measured cold):DX

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm2)LX, EX, LX V-6, EX V-6

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm2)

▼▲Main Menu